Quarterlytics / Communication Services / Specialty Business Services / Wincanton

Wincanton

win · LSE Communication Services
Claim this profile
Ticker win
Exchange LSE
Sector Communication Services
Industry Specialty Business Services
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2019 Annual Report · Wincanton
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Delivering innovation now  
Finding ways to shape the future
Annual Report and Accounts 2019

INSIDE THIS REPORT

STRATEGIC REPORT
Introduction  
Chairman’s review 
Our business today 
Our marketplace 
Business model 
Chief Executive’s statement 
How we measure performance 
Providing answers... to deliver 
innovation now 
... and asking the right questions  
to shape the future 
Corporate responsibility report 
Financial review 
Risk report 

1
2
4
6
8
10
17

18

20
22
26
30

GOVERNANCE
The Board 
Chairman’s introduction  
to Corporate Governance 
Corporate Governance report 
Nomination Committee report 
Audit Committee report 

34

36
37
40
41

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
Remuneration Committee Chairman’s  
Annual Statement 
Annual Report on Remuneration 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy 

44
46
57

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
Directors’ report 
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT
Independent auditor’s report 

60
61

63

70

71
72

ACCOUNTS
Consolidated income statement 
Consolidated statement  
of comprehensive income 
Consolidated balance sheet 
Consolidated statement  
of changes in equity 
Consolidated statement of cash flows 
Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements  
75
Wincanton plc Company balance sheet  106
Wincanton plc Company statement 
of changes in equity 
Notes to the Wincanton plc  
Company financial statements 
Group five year record 
Shareholder information 
Board of Directors and advisers 

108
110
111
112

73
74

107

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

INTRODUCTION

Times change.  
Yet trust, teamwork and reputations endure. 

Wincanton is the largest British third party logistics company 
(3PL), providing supply chain solutions to some of the world’s 
most admired – and most demanding – companies. We have 
built great relationships with these customers, working closely 
together and helping them rise to the rapidly-changing 
challenges across a wide range of industries including retail, 
construction, defence and energy.

How do we help them stay one step 
ahead in a fast-moving world?

FOR MORE INFORMATION SEE PAGE 18

FOR MORE INFORMATION SEE PAGE 20

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

1

Strategic report

CHAIRMAN’S REVIEW

A s
A strong level of new business 
wins and a high level of contract 
wi
renewals position us well to grow 
ren
in t
in the year ahead.

Dr. Martin Read CBE 
Dr. M
Chairm
Chairman

FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS

Revenue 

£1,141.5m
-2.6%

Underlying operating profit1

£55.3m
+4.5%

Underlying operating profit margin1

Operating profit margin 

4.8%
+30bps

Net debt1 

£19.3m
-34.6%

4.8%
+100bps

Operating profit

£54.6m
+23.0%

Underlying earnings per share1 

Basic earnings per share

34.5p
+36.9%

33.5p
+8.8%

Dividend per share

10.89p
+10.0% 

1  See page 29 for further information on the Alternative Performance Measures (APMs), including definitions 

and a reconciliation of APMs to statutory measures.

2

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

INTRODUCTION

I was delighted to have been appointed 
Chairman of Wincanton in August of last year. 
One of the things that particularly struck me 
as I visited our sites is the commitment of our 
people to doing a good job for our customers. 
This is one of the core reasons that has made 
Wincanton such a trusted brand. Our people’s 
commitment to doing things well also 
underlies the Group’s impressive track record 
in health and safety.

Over recent years, Wincanton has successfully 
rebuilt its financial position. Its balance sheet 
and cash flow are much healthier and the 
reliability of its earnings much improved. 
Our challenge now is to use the Group’s 
respected market position, its extensive national 
coverage in the UK and its strong operational 
base to develop and grow profitably. I believe 
Wincanton can deliver much better value for its 
shareholders in the years ahead.

RESULTS

The Group delivered good growth in 
underlying profit before tax of 6.3% in the year 
and underlying earnings per share were up by 
2.7p over the prior year to 33.5p, an increase 
of 8.8%. Revenue performance was impacted 
by the loss of certain contracts at the end of 
the previous financial year and first half of 
this year. We have, however, been seeking to 
shift our business increasingly towards more 
value-added activities with improved profit 
margins. Pleasingly, there was a strong level of 
new business wins and a high level of contract 
renewals in the second half of the financial 
year which positions us well to grow in the year 
ahead. Our cash generation remains strong. 
This enables us to invest in our organic growth 
strategy as well as satisfying the needs of our 
various stakeholders such as our shareholders 
and pension scheme. 

DIVIDENDS

The Board is pleased to be recommending an 
increased final dividend of 7.29p per ordinary 

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

share for the year ended 31 March 2019 
(2018: 6.63p), bringing the total dividend for 
the year to 10.89p (2018: 9.90p). This reflects the 
Group’s progressive dividend policy, with the 
annual dividend growth broadly matched to 
the growth in underlying earnings.

OUR PEOPLE 

As always, our people are our most important 
asset. Their dedication to delivering the 
best for our customers is the cornerstone of 
Wincanton’s position as a trusted partner for our 
clients. I would therefore like to thank our 17,600 
colleagues for their efforts over the last year. 

In building an organisation that people aspire 
to work for, we must continually ensure 
that we live our values every day. We have a 
strong focus on maintaining a safe working 
environment and our Health and Safety record 
shows continued year-on-year improvement 
for the sixth year in a row. 

Inclusion is also important to us and we 
are continuing to train all our leaders on 
unconscious bias. The pay data for Wincanton, 
like many other organisations, shows a gender 
pay gap and we have reported a median 
overall gap of 10% compared to the national 
average of 9%. We have therefore established 
working groups to better understand how we 
can attract more females into our industry in 
higher paid roles and help fulfil our growth 
strategy in the coming years. 

We recognise the increasing need to consider 
the employee voice at Board level as well as 
throughout the business. We have therefore 
appointed Stewart Oades, our Senior 
Independent Director, as our employee 
representative Non-executive Director. This is 
in line with the recently announced changes 
to the UK Corporate Governance Code, due to 
come into effect in 2019-2020. 

THE BOARD

My focus is on building a strong and 
collaborative Board that provides the 
leadership and experience to help manage 

Wincanton’s next phase of development. 
We have recently developed a skills matrix and 
conducted a Board effectiveness review to 
ensure that the Board collectively possesses the 
necessary breadth and depth of skills.

In May of this year, we announced that Adrian 
Colman will step down as Chief Executive 
no later than the end of October. Adrian has 
been with the Group for six years, the last four 
as Chief Executive. He has made a significant 
contribution to the development of the 
Group and I thank him for his commitment 
and hard work. Adrian will be succeeded as 
Chief Executive by James Wroath who will be 
appointed to the Board no later than the end 
of October. Adrian will remain on the Board 
as Chief Executive until that time. James joins 
us from LSG Sky Chefs and brings with him 
significant experience in contract logistics and 
business services generally, having held senior 
roles in logistics, transportation and distribution.

I am also delighted to welcome Debbie Lentz 
to our Board from June 2019. Debbie brings 
a strong track record in digital and supply 
chain management, both of which are highly 
relevant to the further development of 
Wincanton’s eCommerce propositions.

I should particularly like to thank our Senior 
Independent Director, Stewart Oades, for 
standing in as Interim Chairman following 
the sudden death of our previous Chairman, 
Steve Marshall, through to the date of my 
appointment in August 2018. 

Our thanks are also due to Martin Sawkins, who 
retired from the Board in December 2018, for his 
six years of service. Gill Barr, who was appointed 
a Director and member of the Remuneration 
Committee in September 2017, succeeded 
Martin as our Remuneration Committee Chair 
with effect from November 2018.

David Radcliffe will retire as a Non-executive 
Director, with effect from 31 December 2019 
after seven years’ service. We thank him for 
his diligence and his contribution and will be 
carrying out a search for his successor in the 
coming months.

SOME KEY ISSUES AND INITIATIVES

The Group concluded the negotiations 
of the triennial valuation of the defined 
benefit pension scheme in August 2018. 
This agreement provides an affordable and 
sustainable solution. Crucially, it retains the 
Group’s ability to invest in the business and 
to maintain its progressive dividend policy. 
The Group has also extended its £141m of bank 
finance facilities through to October 2023. 
Both these agreements provide increased 
certainty and stability for the Group.

Looking ahead, the Group’s main priority is to 
make further progress in the delivery of our 
organic growth strategy and it is encouraging 
that we have recently added a number of new, 
high quality customers to our portfolio. 

During the year, we launched the second 
round of our W2 Labs initiative, following the 
success of the first round in the previous year. 
This initiative is focused on identifying and 
developing new areas of innovation to help 
our customers. This year, we are concentrating 
on driving innovative solutions in areas such 
as robotics, data analytics and cloud-based 
warehouse optimisation systems.

OUTLOOK

The Group remains well positioned in its 
chosen markets and continues to deliver 
strong service levels to its customers. We are 
putting in place the teams and structures 
to underpin growth, build on Wincanton’s 
market positions and deliver long-term 
sustainable growth in the business. We remain 
focused on ensuring that this growth is 
both profitable and cash generative and will 
continue to pursue a disciplined approach in 
our delivery. Healthy cash flow sustains our 
growth capability, our significant investment 
in talent and innovation, and our distributions 
to our shareholders and the pension scheme. 
During the coming year, the Board expects 
Wincanton to make continued progress.

Dr. Martin Read CBE 
Chairman

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

3

Strategic report

OUR BUSINESS TODAY

FACTS AND FIGURES

WHAT WE DO – RETAIL & CONSUMER

Revenue 

£1.1bn

Colleagues 

17,600

Drivers 

4,600

Locations 

200+

Warehousing space 

Vehicles responsible for

 14.3m sqft

3,600

Wincanton is the largest British third party 
logistics company (3PL), providing supply chain 
solutions to some of the world’s most admired 
companies across a wide range of industries 
including retail, construction, defence and 
energy. As a trusted and respected business 
partner, we design and implement services 
and solutions that range from setting up and 
operating distribution networks, through to 
bonded warehouses, technology hosting, 
container transport and storage. We strive for 
operational excellence in everything we do.

OUR VISION

At Wincanton, our vision is to work together to build the most 
innovative, effective and respected logistics company in the 
UK and Ireland. To achieve this, it is our mission to make our 
customers’ business better, every day.

OUR FOCUS

We work hard to understand and respond to our customers’ 
needs, build long-term relationships and use our skills and 
expertise to deliver a smarter, added value service, every day. 
Our customers rely on us to make their businesses operate 
more efficiently and to gain a competitive advantage in 
their sector. 

OUR VALUES

  Excellence

  Proactivity

  Integrity

  Passion

  Togetherness

  Trust

4

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Our Retail & Consumer 
operations make sure 
that grocers, general 
retailers and consumer 
product manufacturers 
can continue to meet the 
fast-changing and ever-
increasing expectations  
of their consumers.

From click-and-collect 
to good old fashioned 
traditional shopping trips, 
we have the skills and 
the experience to deliver 
the right experience – 
when, where and how 
consumers want it.

eFulfilment and multichannel
We streamline processes and 
deliver customer satisfaction 
across the complete multichannel 
retail environment, including 
order management and delivery, 
through to the assembly 
of goods in the home and 
managing returns.

Collaboration
We work closely with our 
customers to find innovative ways 
of collaborating to achieve great 
results. Our reputation is built on 
a proven track record of providing 
the right mix of people, space and 
fleet to support their businesses.

Transformation 
We continually invest in 
innovation to identify and shape 
the brightest, most effective new 
technologies and processes – and 
then use them to transform our 
sector and the way we support 
our customers.

WHAT WE DO – INDUSTRIAL & TRANSPORT

Supported by an extensive 
and specialised transport 
network, our Industrial 
& Transport operations 
handle a wide range of 
industrial products – from 
fuel, bricks and engineering 
components to containers 
and general goods. We have 
the third largest Large Goods 
Vehicle (LGV) fleet in the 
country and we maintain 
Light Commercial Vehicles 
(LCV) and LGVs on behalf 
of customers.

Transport
Our extensive fleet of general and 
specialist vehicles includes ready-
mix cement mixers, fuel tankers 
and traditional general haulage 
vehicles. We also have the UK’s 
greatest number of mechanical 
off-loaders (for bricks and blocks).

Compliant operations
The health and safety of our 
people is the number one item 
on every Board agenda, and we 
will tolerate nothing less than the 
highest levels of performance. 
This commitment is supported 
by our compliance to stringent 
standards including SC21, FORS 
and ADR.

Asset optimisation
We work hard to get the best 
possible performance out of 
all assets. We optimise our 
fleet as well as those of our 
customers through industry-
leading support systems and 
the use of state-of-the-art 
technology, as well as proactive 
maintenance programmes 
provided by our Pullman Fleet 
Services business. 

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

OPERATIONAL SPLIT

KEY MARKET SECTORS

62%
of Group

Retail General Merchandise

Revenue

£423.8m

Our industry-leading eFulfilment services 
enable non-food retailers with stores 
and/or online activities to rise to the 
challenges of a multichannel market.

Customers include:
Argos / B&Q / Loaf.com / M&S / Screwfix 

Revenue

£708.9m

Retail Grocery 

Revenue

£180.8m

Consumer Products 

Revenue

£104.3m

56%
of Group

Underlying operating profit

£31.2m

Our flexible and reliable supply chain 
operations help food retailers serve 
consumers efficiently and cost-effectively.

Customers include:
Asda / Co-op / Sainsbury’s / Waitrose & Partners

We integrate supply chains and create new, more efficient 
ways of working for manufacturers supplying the retail 
market with food, or non-food, products.

Customers include:
Husqvarna / Lucozade Ribena Suntory /  
Nestlé / The Kraft Heinz Company / 
The Weetabix Food Company

38%
of Group

Transport Services

Revenue

£171.4m

Across the UK, we provide general haulage, 
container transport and fleet maintenance services 
to retail, consumer and industrial customers as well 
as to shipping lines and freight forwarders. 

Customers include: 
adidas / British Sugar / Hapag-Lloyd / HMRC / 
Mediterranean Shipping Company (MSC) 

Revenue

£432.6m

Construction

Revenue

£136.7m

44%
of Group

Other 

Revenue

Underlying operating profit

£24.1m

£124.5m

We keep the UK building sector working efficiently through 
the reliable delivery of construction materials, including 
bricks and roof tiles. By drawing on the latest technology 
as well as decades of experience, we have gained a leading 
reputation for managing the timely flow of key products 
such as cement. We provide logistics services to many major 
infrastructure programmes, including the construction 
of the new nuclear power station at Hinkley Point. 

Customers include: 
Aggregate Industries / EDF Energy / Hanson / Ibstock 

Customers operating in a range of specialist sectors – 
including defence, energy and food – trust Wincanton to 
meet the most demanding compliance and operating 
requirements. Our defence operation provides Original 
Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) with on-site factory and 
parts logistics for major programmes, including managing 
the movements of materials across international borders. 

Customers include: 
Alstom / BAE Systems / Müller Milk & Ingredients /  
Thales / Valero 

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

5

Strategic report

OUR MARKETPLACE

RETAIL & CONSUMER

CHALLENGES

Delivering the right  
customer experience

Cost to serve

The customer journey

Online purchases continue to rise – 
and so too does the risk for retailers 
of trusting their customer experience 
to third parties. Major customers are 
looking for relationships based on 
technology, trust and integrity to 
underpin the volume and value of 
their last mile deliveries. 

As online and in-store competition 
increases, retailers are seeking 
innovative solutions such as 
automation, that deliver the right 
brand experience at lower cost. 

Retailers recognise the importance of 
the ‘customer journey’. They are keen 
to deliver a seamless eCommerce 
experience in line with consumer 
expectations – despite the challenges 
associated with increasingly complex 
supply chains. 

INDUSTRIAL & TRANSPORT

CHALLENGES

Efficient and sustainable  
operations

Visibility and tracking

Health and safety

Just being cost effective is no longer 
enough. Today, as consumers and 
customers become increasingly 
aware of environmental challenges, 
the focus has shifted to also embrace 
issues around both efficiency and 
long-term sustainability. 

Driven by consumer demand, our 
customers need to be confident that 
their logistics partner can deliver 
on time, on budget and on brand – 
taking the challenges of shortened 
delivery timescales and fragmented 
drop locations in their stride. 

Concern from the general public – 
as well as from our customers and our 
own teams – has brought renewed 
but welcome focus on industry issues 
such as driver wellbeing and the 
challenges of running large vehicles 
on public highways. 

6

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

HOW WE ARE RESPONDING

Delivering for  
our customers 

Continuously improving 
our operations 

Evolving our capability 

Our home delivery operations 
support the brand experience of 
leading retailers. We do not just 
deliver their goods – we deliver their 
brand promises too, as evidenced by 
our track record for customer results 
and top rated independent reviews. 

We never stop working to enhance 
our customers’ competitive 
advantage. Our dedicated 
Continuous Improvement team 
works closely with our customers, 
tailoring our services to reduce the 
overall cost to serve while maintaining 
the highest service levels.

Although we work with a wide 
range of customers, they all have 
one factor in common – an endless 
need for smarter and more efficient 
ways of working. New technology 
and our commitment to providing 
greater efficiency help us develop 
new initiatives that meet our 
customers’ multichannel needs. 
For example, the latest iteration of 
Manhattan Associates’ market-leading 
Warehouse Management System 
gives us and our retail customers a 
flexible order fulfilment approach that 
delivers an integrated, multichannel 
buying experience for the consumer. 

HOW WE ARE RESPONDING

Putting innovation 
into action 

We put brilliant ideas into practice for 
the benefit of our customers, working 
closely with key suppliers to trial, 
evaluate and deploy new equipment. 
In recent years, we have seen many 
examples of Wincanton being 
early adopters and supporters of 
developments that have changed our 
industry. For example, we invested 
in some of the very first new electric 
7.5 tonne vehicles in the UK, to do 
our own trials with our customers. 
We are also at the forefront of 
enhanced vehicle telematics which 
proactively track journeys to promote 
better driving methods and reduce 
accidents. Collectively, these initiatives 
deliver lower emissions, better 
efficiency and improved safety for 
our drivers and other road users. 

Deploying technology 
to improve visibility 
and customer service

Technology has transformed our 
industry. We have already deployed 
vehicle telematics and forward-facing 
safety cameras into our fleets to help 
engage drivers and enhance fuel 
efficiency. New initiatives continue 
to challenge established ways of 
working. For example, our Winsight 
in-cab technology improves fleet 
optimisation and delivery visibility by 
connecting our drivers with regional 
planning teams, creating effective 
route planning and providing 
fleet transparency. 

Delivering safety first 

Ensuring the health and safety 
of our people is a never-ending 
challenge that demands the highest 
levels of commitment and resource 
right across the business. We focus 
on engaging with our driver and 
warehouse teams, and promoting 
behavioural change through the 
use of specific training modules 
and approaches.

In addition, we partner with external 
industry bodies to improve safety – 
for example by raising awareness of 
issues such as bridge strikes. We also 
continue to play a leading role in 
the Chartered Institute of Logistics 
and Transport (CILT) safety forum, 
championing industry topics around 
health and safety. 

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

7

Strategic report

BUSINESS MODEL

THE RESOURCES WE NEED

HOW WE CREATE VALUE

Skilled knowledge 
and expertise
A great business is built on the 
innovative thinking of great 
people. The skills and expertise 
of our teams is behind the 
success of our customers.

Colleagues

17,600

Flexible warehouse 
facilities
We rely on an actively managed 
portfolio of Wincanton and 
customer locations, from 
dedicated sites to shared 
user operations. 

Warehousing space

14.3m sqft

Multimodal transport 
operations
Vehicles that are owned and 
managed by us ensure a flexible, 
safe and efficient service.

Vehicles responsible for

3,600

Proven technology and 
logistics systems
Integrated and flexible 
systems provide customers 
with visibility and control.

Locations

200+

Customer 

Health and Safety

People Transition

It is almost impossible 
to imagine a world 
without Wincanton. 
Our teams are 
responsible for 
everything from 
freezers to ice cream... 
jeans to beans... 
diesel to engine 
parts. We work with 
customers to store, 
pick, process and 
deliver the things 
that keep Britain’s 
wheels turning.

Ensuring the health and 
safety of our people, 
our customers and 
the wider public is the 
non-negotiable starting 
point for everything 
we do. Nothing is 
more important to our 
business – and we work 
tirelessly to embed and 
continually improve 
health and safety 
processes at every level 
of Wincanton.

Transferring people 
across multiple sites 
is stressful for the 
individuals concerned 
and challenging for the 
business. We combine 
excellent relationships 
with trade unions and a 
tried-and-tested TUPE 
approach to make sure 
that colleagues are 
transferred with respect 
and integrity.

Continuous  
Improvement

We know that we can 
always work smarter. 
More than 600 Lean 
Sigma specialists help 
us create innovative 
solutions and 
implement cutting edge 
technology. We support 
this drive for continuous 
improvement with 
a suite of in-house 
tools including self-
assessment databases, 
balanced scorecards 
and employee surveys.

INNOVATION

W2 LABS
W2 Labs is about bringing Wincanton and the 
best start-ups together to pitch ideas on how 
innovation can drive improvement across the 
supply chain. We look to work with small, start-up 
organisations, that can help us find new solutions 
to some of the industry challenges we see today 
and in the future. 

We fuel the process with ideas, challenge each 
other and experiment, so that we can implement 
the best opportunities. 

W2 IDEAS ACCELERATOR
W2 Ideas Accelerator is our internal innovation 
programme. Supported by a social media 
platform, it allows colleagues to identify challenges 
and problems – and to seek ideas, solutions and 
comments from across the business. 

CONTRACT TYPE

Open book 
operations

60%

Open book contracts will typically cover our costs 
plus an agreed management fee. This provides 
visible earnings with modest margins, but with low 
risk to the business. 

8

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

IT Services

Property

Collaboration

Our IT teams are 
vastly experienced, 
knowledgeable and 
recognised as operating 
right at the forefront 
of change. We work 
closely with customers 
to understand their 
businesses and their 
needs to design, 
specify and implement 
warehouse and 
transport management 
systems with the ability 
to transform ways 
of working.

We have a 
long-established 
understanding 
of UK and Ireland 
logistics. We help 
customers source 
the most appropriate 
warehouse solutions, 
manage leases and 
explore collaborative 
opportunities to 
maximise space. 
For example, we 
have launched 
oneVASTwarehouse.com  
to directly connect 
buyers and sellers of 
warehouse space.

We use our unparalleled 
industry knowledge 
to constantly seek new 
and more innovative 
ways of collaborating 
to achieve great results. 
From providing flexible 
support during peak 
periods to leveraging 
shared resources, 
we have the expertise 
and experience to 
deliver business 
efficiencies and support 
customer objectives.

W2 PARTNER NETWORK
The W2 Partner Network comprises of selected 
partners offering the latest innovative technologies 
that will impact the evolution of the supply chain 
in the near future, the next 24 months and beyond. 

We are bringing together technology partners 
to make the digitised supply chain a reality. 

FOR MORE INFORMATION SEE PAGE 19

Closed book 
operations

40%

Contracts are competitively priced and see us 
own the principal financial opportunity along with 
manageable and controllable risks. The greater 
deployment of resources across contracts offers 
improved returns. 

THE VALUE WE CREATE

Delivered  
to home

Delivered  
to workplace

Customer focused delivery
Whether delivering to a building 
site, a distribution centre, 
a high street store or end 
customer, we provide a leading 
customer experience.

– Construction site
– Distribution centre
– Forecourt
– Hospital
– Office
– Retailer
–  Theatre of operation 

More efficient  
supply chains
By improving service, reducing 
waste and maximising capacity, 
we make our customers’ supply 
chains better, every day.

A safer environment for all
We maintain a relentless focus 
on the health and safety of our 
employees, visitors and the 
communities we serve.

Sustainable operations
We drive reductions in our 
emissions via investment, 
awareness, training and 
recognition – all enabled 
by changing behaviours and 
advanced technology.

Shareholder value
We rigorously manage our 
business, our costs and our risks 
to generate sustainable total 
shareholder returns. 

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

9

Strategic report

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STATEMENT

We delivered a strong 
operational performance 
with increased margins 
and profits translating into 
healthy cash generation, 
allowing us to invest in the 
growth of the business and 
progressively increase our 
returns to shareholders.

Our focus on operational excellence 
and innovative thinking has continued 
to provide a great platform and 
underpins our role as a collaborative 
partner for our customers.

Adrian Colman 
Chief Executive

We continue to provide innovative solutions 
to help our customers through the challenges 
they are facing in the market place, such as 
changing consumer trends, ways of shopping 
and planning for Brexit. We have explored and 
deployed new innovations that will drive the 
logistics sector in the immediate future as well 
as the years ahead.

Revenue in the year ended 31 March 2019 was 
£1,141.5m (2018: £1,171.9m), which represents 
a year-on-year decrease of 2.6% and was 
primarily driven by the timing of contract wins 
and losses. The business delivered a strong 
level of new business wins in the year, however, 
these were contracted predominantly in the 
second half of the year and made little or no 
contribution to revenue in the year to 31 March 
2019. As such these strong wins did not fully 
mitigate the revenue impact from contracts 
lost at the end of the previous financial year 
and first half of this year. However, as some 
of the contracts were lower margin their loss 
has contributed to an overall increase in the 
Group’s operating profit margin in the year. 

The underlying operating profit margin 
increased to 4.8%, a 30 bps increase on the 
4.5% achieved in the prior year partly due to 
the loss of contracts that were not delivering 
an appropriate operating margin for the Group. 
Underlying operating profit increased by 4.5% 
to £55.3m (2018: £52.9m) benefitting from 
strong operational performance as well as the 
impact of ongoing performance improvement 
initiatives implemented in the previous year. 

In our target markets we continued to 
leverage our differentiated network, service 
and technological innovation, to grow the 
business organically with existing customers 
and to win new business in an increasingly 
competitive and evolving market place. This is 
highlighted by the strong 9.0% growth that we 
have delivered in Retail General Merchandise 
revenues in the year. This reflects the impact 
of growth in existing accounts and in new 
contract wins. Our strength in this area 
highlights our capabilities in the important 
multichannel eFulfilment arena where we 
excel in areas such as services to the Home & 
DIY market place, including our market leading 
two-man home delivery service proposition. 
Overall revenue declined marginally in the 
year due to the timing of contract wins being 
heavily biased towards the final quarter and 
therefore not contributing to in year revenue.

Our business model focuses on the products 
across all retail and industrial sectors that are 
the staples of consumption of the population 
of the UK. Whatever the outcome of the Brexit 
deliberations, we expect that the population 
will continue to consume these products in 
similar volumes. This gives us great stability in 
our model irrespective of decisions that may 
affect the broader relationships between the 
UK and its international partners. 

Our teams delivered another successful 
retail peak season in the months leading up 
to December, which is a testament to our 
dedicated drivers and amazing warehouse 
colleagues who all put the hard work in to 
make sure that our customers – and their end 
consumers across the UK – get everything 
that they need, when they need it, across 
this key trading period. By being able to 
deliver all around the country, either via 
traditional warehouse to store operation, 
or via our eFulfilment processes, this has been 
a performance which our colleagues can all 
be very proud of. 

10

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

PERFORMANCE SUMMARY

Revenue (£m)
Underlying EBITDA (£m)1
Underlying operating profit (£m)2
Underlying operating margin (%)2
Underlying EPS1

2019
 1,141.5
 66.7
 55.3
 4.8%
33.5p

2018 
1,171.9
64.8
52.9
4.5%
30.8p

Change
(2.6)%
2.9%
4.5%
30bps
8.8%

1  Underlying EBITDA refers to underlying operating profit before depreciation and amortisation and is reconciled in Note 3 

to the financial statements. 

2  Further information on Alternative Performance Measures (APMs), including definitions and a reconciliation of APMs 

to statutory measures are provided on page 29.

The positive actions taken last year to address 
the cost base have made our business more 
competitive in bidding, winning and retaining 
business. Additionally, we have been able to 
continue to improve our operating profitability 
despite pressures on costs, predominantly 
in respect of labour costs from wage 
inflation together with statutory increases 
in auto-enrolment pension rates and the 
national minimum wage. 

Strong underlying EPS growth of 8.8% reflects 
the growth in underlying operating profit and 
lower net financing costs as we continued to 
manage down the pension liabilities during 
the year. This growth in underlying earnings 
enables us to also increase our recommended 
final dividend per share to 7.29p, resulting 
in a total dividend per share of 10.89p for 
the year, reflecting a dividend cover level of 
approximately three times. 

Group underlying EPS

2019

2018

2017

2016

2015

33.5

30.8

27.7

23.9

21.1

0

5

10

15

25

30

35

20
Pence

RETAIL & CONSUMER

Revenue (£m)
Underlying 
operating profit (£m)
Margin (%)

2019
708.9

2018
691.7

Change
2.5%

5.1%
29.7
31.2
4.4% 4.3% 10bps

Retail & Consumer reported revenues of 
£708.9m for the year, an increase of 2.5% 
compared with the £691.7m reported in 
the previous year. The contractual split in 
this segment, between open and closed 
book, remains relatively unchanged with 
83% under open book terms (2018: 85%). 
Margins increased due to an improvement 
in mix arising from higher margins in new 
business than from lost contracts. The resulting 
underlying operating profit for the year was 
£31.2m (2018: £29.7m), up 5.1%, representing 
a good performance in a retail environment 
that provided significant commercial and 
operational challenges during the year.

The split of Retail & Consumer revenue by 
the industry sectors it serves is as follows: 

2019  
£m

20181 

£m Change

Retail General 
Merchandise
423.8
Retail Grocery
180.8
Consumer Products 104.3
708.9

388.8
193.2
109.7
691.7

9.0%
(6.4)%
(4.9)%
2.5%

1  Certain contracts within Retail General Merchandise and 
Retail Grocery have been realigned within the segment 
split, in line with how management reviews the business.

The overall revenue growth in the segment 
was primarily due to the full year benefit from 
new contracts including IKEA, wilko and Wickes 
together with volume growth in Retail General 
Merchandise, partly offset by the loss of contracts 
with Tesco and Premier Foods. The growth 
was largely achieved through our continued 
focus on helping our customers deliver a better 
experience to their own customers, with strong 
growth in eFulfilment, particularly from two-man 
home delivery activities. 

During the year we signed a three-year 
contract to provide a full multichannel logistics 
solution for Jollyes, The Pet Superstore. 
Our new service will deploy Wincanton’s 
latest eFulfilment technology to create a pick, 
pack and ship operation, including customer 
returns, carrier management and supplier-to-
customer capabilities.

We won a number of other major contracts 
during the year, including two five-year 
contracts with The Weetabix Food Company, 
as a result of which we are now responsible 
for providing both the warehouse and the 
transport services to support the iconic 
breakfast brand in its growth ambitions. 
We won a contract with Roper Rhodes, 
one of the UK’s leading independent 
suppliers of bathroom furniture and products, 
who have entrusted us to create and run a 
dedicated delivery solution structured around 
our IT expertise and use of in-cab technology. 
We also won a three-year contract with the 
Co-op which will see Wincanton manage 
all warehouse and store delivery operations 
from a facility near Northampton to new and 
existing stores in the surrounding area.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

11

Strategic report

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STATEMENT CONTINUED

The split of Industrial & Transport revenue by 
the activities undertaken is as follows: 

Transport Services
Construction
Other

2019  
£m
171.4
136.7
124.5
432.6

20181

£m Change
210.6 (18.6)%
(9.0)%
150.3
4.4%
119.3
(9.9)%
480.2

1  Certain contracts within Transport Services and 

Construction have been realigned within the segment 
split, in line with how management reviews the business.

This year saw a series of notable new contract 
wins. In Transport Services, Banbury-based 
health, beauty and household brand distributor 
DCS Group who distribute for the biggest 
health, beauty and household brands including 
P&G, Unilever, J&J, SC Johnson, Colgate, RB and 
PZ Cussons, awarded Wincanton a three-year 
contract to provide nationwide transport, 
delivery and management of inter-site transfers 
of finished goods and stock.

Construction remains an important area 
for Wincanton and we were delighted to 
be appointed by EDF Energy as the official 
warehouse and transport service partner 
for the nuclear new build project at Hinkley 
Point. We also expanded our partnership with 
Aggregate Industries, with a five-year deal 
for the distribution of concrete products from 
the majority of its UK manufacturing sites. 

Also within Other business, we were pleased 
to win a contract with HMRC, who appointed 
us to provide logistics services to support 
air and sea freight inspections. This five-year 
agreement will see us work together with 
HMRC to check inbound shipments into the 
UK, operating two newly established Inland 
Pre-Clearance sites, with associated transport. 
HMRC and Border Force undertake targeted 
checks inland, which help prevent wrongly-
declared goods from flowing into the country. 

However, the timing of these wins was too 
late to contribute in the financial year and fully 
mitigate the loss of certain contracts earlier in 
the year in Construction and Transport Services, 
which resulted in an overall revenue decrease 
in the year. 

Contract renewals are the mark of operational 
excellence and the Industrial & Transport 
business was successful in securing a 
good number of major contracts up for 
renewal during the year. These included 
agreements with Marley and Ibstock in the 
Construction sector and with British Sugar 
in Transport Services. 

Our Energy business, which is included within 
Other revenues, successfully negotiated a new 
five-year contract with leading LPG supplier 
AvantiGas, which will extend our strong 
relationship through to 2023. This contract 
will incorporate new levels of innovation such 
as our vehicle telematics system. We also 
renewed our Valero fuels distribution contract 
for another five years in part due to our solution 
for Vendor Managed Inventory. As part of this, 
Wincanton will monitor and control stocks at 
key retail sites across the country, enhancing 
customer service and product availability. 

Satisfied customers are our most important 
ambassadors and so contract renewals or 
extensions are sound endorsements of the 
benefits that our services deliver in practice. 
Consequently it was very pleasing to see our 
agreement to provide dedicated transport and 
warehousing for Asda extended for another 
three years. Our relationship with Asda dates 
back to 2005, underlining the importance 
that we, and our customers, place on trust, 
mutual respect and long-term partnerships. 
Additionally, our relationship with Micheldever 
Tyre Services (MTS), which has flourished for 
many years, led to a new ten-year contract to 
provide warehousing and transport services as 
MTS itself targets doubling the size of its supply 
chain operations within the M25. 

In addition, the UK’s leading cycling and car 
accessories retailer, Halfords, extended our 
contract as the sole supplier of transport 
services in the UK by a further five years. 
We also agreed an extension to our eFulfilment 
contract with high-growth furniture supplier, 
Loaf.com. Meanwhile, we secured an extension 
to our contract to provide supply chain services 
for Lucozade Ribena Suntory, with this latest 
agreement taking the association between our 
companies to over 25 years.

INDUSTRIAL & TRANSPORT 

2019 
432.6

2018  Change 
(9.9)%

Revenue (£m)
Underlying 
operating profit (£m)
3.9%
Underlying Margin (%) 5.6% 4.8% 80bps

480.2

24.1

23.2

Industrial & Transport reported revenues for the 
year of £432.6m (2018: £480.2m), a reduction of 
9.9% on the prior year. We exited or reduced 
the level of activity in a number of lower 
margin areas including transport activities with 
Britvic and Tarmac, while still retaining these 
important customers in areas where we can 
generate value for them and us. This proactive 
approach to contract management, together 
with actions taken to reduce the cost base and 
right-size some areas of capacity has resulted 
in an 80bps increase in underlying operating 
margin to 5.6%. The underlying operating profit 
increased by 3.9% to £24.1m (2018: £23.2m). 

12

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Drive efficient operations...

Differentiate  
our position...

Growth
By putting customers  
at the centre of  
what we do

Be an 
organisation  
that people 
aspire to...

STRATEGIC PROGRESS

Our aim is to deliver organic 
growth. The Group’s strategy 
is designed to support a 
resilient and predictable 
profit and cash stream with 
increasing returns for all 
stakeholders. We do this by:

1.  Differentiating our position in the 

logistics industry through delivering 
innovation, collaboration and safe, 
sustainable operations

2.  Growing by putting customers at the 

centre of what we do

3.  Driving efficient operations through 
integrated and consistent services

4.   Being an organisation that people 

aspire to work for and with

WE HAVE SET OUT OUR 
PROGRESS AGAINST 
THESE BELOW:

1.  Differentiating our position 
in the logistics industry 

INNOVATION 

We continually monitor our sector and 
other related areas in order to identify new 
technologies and better ways of working 
that have the potential to transform services 
for our customers. Our ground-breaking 
W2 programme is building a powerful track 
record as a business incubator. W2 is all about 
the power of two: combining the power of 
Wincanton with that of our colleagues, our 
customers or our partners. 2018 was again a 
year where W2 was the starting point for several 
bright ideas that are already making their way 
into a variety of customer-centric solutions.

W2 Labs: The second year of our W2 Labs 
programme saw another exceptional cohort 
of start-ups work with us to explore new 
approaches to some of the challenges our 
industry faces, including two different types of 
low-cost robotics, a customer service chatbot 
and tools for deriving data-driven insight 
from across the value chain. Six start-ups 
were selected to take part in an intensive 
10-week programme, during which time we 
helped them refine and adapt their business 
propositions. Those we judged to have the 
greatest potential to improve our services will 
now be given the opportunity to work with 
Wincanton on a wider basis, long term.

One of the outcomes of the first year of W2 Labs 
is the development of an online trading 
platform for warehouse space called VAST 
(Virtual Access to Storage and Transport) 
which we launched in the first half of 2019. 
oneVASTwarehouse.com will enable us, and 
our customers, to make spare warehouse space 
visible to a wide audience and trade this with 
other customers to improve the utilisation of 
warehouse space more effectively. 

13

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’  remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent  auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019Strategic report

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STATEMENT CONTINUED

We continued to digitise our own business 
during the year. For example, we invested 
in our new Transport Management System, 
which will underpin our transport strategy to 
support safety, growth and fleet optimisation. 
The new solution will allow us to better plan 
and model delivery scenarios, while operational 
data can be used to simulate routes and loads 
in a virtual environment, informing real-world 
operations. It will bring measurable benefits to 
us and our customers in the form of improved 
efficiencies and communication.

COLLABORATION

SAFETY AND SUSTAINABILITY 

There is something special that we bring to our 
customers by collaborating for mutual benefit. 
As we operate across a wide cross-section 
of the physical goods economy, we have 
gathered a wealth of experience and data on 
the cyclicality of our customers’ businesses 
on a daily, weekly and annual basis. 

We are able to analyse and interpret this data, 
flexibly deploying the capability and assets 
from sectors undergoing quieter times to those 
experiencing seasonal peaks. This enables 
our customers to cost-effectively access the 
resources and services they need, when 
they need them. For example, over the 2018 
Christmas period, we again redirected drivers 
and vehicle assets from our Construction 
business, which is traditionally quiet at that 
time of year, into the busy Retail ‘peak season’. 
We have also brought through a number 
of collaborative space sharing initiatives to 
customers across our portfolio during the year. 

The health, safety and wellbeing of our people 
is paramount in Wincanton. The year saw 
a continued reduction in reported safety 
incidents and a continued improvement 
in our Lost Time Incident Frequency Rate 
performance indicator from 0.62 last year to 
0.51 this year. Our people continue to recognise 
our effort and priority focus towards health 
and safety, with our Your Pulse colleague 
engagement survey again reporting high 
scores on awareness and responsibilities. 

We are never complacent and continue to 
work hard to improve our performance, 
ensuring strong cultural engagement 
around behavioural approaches to health 
and safety, as well as technical training 
and robust processes. During the last 
12 months, we became the first third party 
logistics company to fully roll out Alcumus 
SafeContractor, which is regarded as one of 
the UK’s leading Health & Safety accreditation 
schemes, with over 30,000 contractors and 400 
clients. We also won the Health & Safety award 
at the 2018 CILT Annual Awards for Excellence, 
for our work with Wickes, and partnered with 
Network Rail at the launch of a new campaign 
to educate lorry drivers about the dangers of 
low bridges, and how to avoid them.

14

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

Environmentally-friendly and cost effective, 
electric vehicles are having a huge impact on 
all forms of transport, and during the previous 
year we took delivery of our first five fully 
electric trucks from Daimler. These 7.5 tonne 
vehicles have now been in use for several 
months in our own fleet and with customers, 
primarily in inner cities where the challenges of 
emissions, noise and congestion are greatest.

By introducing production-level electric 
vehicles to our fleet, we can address the 
challenges listed above, that are increasingly 
important to customers, regulators and society. 
In mid-2018, we took another stage towards a 
more environmentally-friendly fleet when we 
commenced trials of LNG (Liquified Natural 
Gas) powered vehicles as part of our ongoing 
commitment to exploring alternative fuels.

3. Driving efficient operations
Logistics never stands still, and we operate 
a strategy of continuous improvement – 
introducing new technology, fine-tuning 
services and finding new ways of working to 
help customers. This reduces customers’ cost 
of operations in open book contracts and 
supports our margins in closed book contracts. 

When existing customers renew or extend 
contracts, it is always a welcome sign that 
we are meeting or exceeding expectations. 
For example, we expanded our relationship 
with Micheldever Tyre Services via a new 
ten-year contract to provide warehousing 
and transport services. We also extended 
our contract as the sole supplier of transport 
services to Halfords in the UK by a further five 
years, and successfully negotiated extensions 
to our agreements to provide services to 
a number of leading firms.

2. Growth
Top-line growth in the Retail & Consumer 
business was offset by a decrease in Industrial 
& Transport in the year, but profits grew again in 
both sectors. The underlying business remains 
strong as evidenced by the combination of 
new business wins, the successful extension 
of services we provide to many of our existing 
customers and the growth in our underlying 
operating profit.

New customers to join the Wincanton portfolio 
during the year included HMRC, for whom we 
are now providing logistics services to support 
air and sea freight inspections and Roper 
Rhodes, where our investment in technology 
gave us the competitive edge in securing the 
contract to provide a delivery solution based 
around our IT expertise and in-cab solutions. 
In addition, we were delighted to win our 
first contracts with Weetabix, which will see 
us provide the full-service logistics package, 
for both the warehouse and transport services. 
We also won new business from customers 
such as Co-op, Aggregate Industries, the DCS 
group and Jollyes, The Pet Superstore, towards 
the end of the year. These contracts are 
expected to drive growth in the future.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

15

Strategic report

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STATEMENT CONTINUED

4.  Be an organisation that people 
aspire to work for and with
We aim to be the industry’s employer of 
choice. Providing career and development 
opportunities is essential for all our 
colleagues, so we continued our ambitious 
apprenticeship scheme during 2018, providing 
57 programmes as part of our commitment 
to develop a pipeline of logistics talent. 

Attracting, training and retaining great 
people is the foundation of our business, 
and we have continued to strive to ensure 
that we have access to a pool of experienced, 
customer-focused drivers in order to deliver 
on our promises to customers. Good drivers 
are challenging to find and recruit, so 
we complement our extensive training 
programmes with additional support, 
for example by providing help with licence 
acquisition. We also help people in warehouse 
roles at Wincanton to make the step up to 
driver status, through our ‘Warehouse to 
Wheels’ programme. We also do all that we 
can to ensure we retain our driving talent 
by recognising their skills through events 
such as the Wincanton Driver of the Year 
competition. This long-established event is 
a powerful engagement tool for our drivers 
and differentiates them from their counterparts 
at other companies. 

Our efforts to support our people have 
continued to be recognised. For example, 
during the year we were immensely proud 
to be named ‘Training Team of the Year’ 
in the Talent in Logistics Awards 2018 who 
commented, “The team from Wincanton 
has shown its commitment to continuously 
improve and strive for ‘best practice’ within 
the company, and to promote its industry 
leader status”.

We gather feedback from our people at 
every opportunity, through both formal and 
informal interactions. The Your Pulse employee 
engagement survey once again saw high levels 
of participation and provided helpful feedback 
for management across the organisation. 

As we move into a new financial year, I know 
that our people have the commitment and 
skills to deliver further improvements and 
to push the boundaries of what is possible. 
I would like to thank them for their continued 
dedication over the last year.

Adrian Colman
Chief Executive

16

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

HOW WE MEASURE PERFORMANCE

Revenue 

£1,141.5m
-2.6%

Underlying EBITDA1 

£66.7m
+2.9%

Underlying operating profit1

£55.3m
+4.5%

2019

2018

2017

2016

1,141.5

1,171.9

2019

2018

1,118.1

2017

1,147.4

2016

66.7

64.8

63.9

65.4

2019

2018

2017

2016

55.3

52.9

52.1

50.9

Consolidated Group revenue.

Operating profit before all amortisation and 
depreciation charges and before exceptional items.

Operating profit before amortisation of acquired 
intangibles and exceptional items.

Underlying operating profit margin1 

4.8%

+30bps

2019

2018

2017

2016

4.8

4.5

4.7

4.4

Net debt1

£19.3m
-34.6%

2019

2018

2017

2016

19.3

29.5

24.3

39.5

Underlying operating profit as a percentage 
of revenue.

Borrowings and other financial liabilities net of cash 
and cash equivalents.

Underlying EPS1 

33.5p

+8.8%

2019

2018

2017

2016

Lost Time Incident Frequency Rate (LTIFR)

Employee Engagement Score

0.51

-17.7%

33.5

30.8

27.7

23.9

2019

2018

2017

2016

67%

+1%

0.51

0.62

0.68

0.71

2019

2018

2017

2016

67

66

64

64

Profit for the year attributable to equity shareholders 
of Wincanton plc before amortisation of acquired 
intangibles, exceptional items and the tax impact 
of those items, as well as other exceptional tax 
items, divided by the weighted average number 
of Ordinary Shares in issue throughout the year.

Number of lost time incidents per 100,000 
hours worked.

The percentage of positive responses to five specific 
statements within the employee survey.

1  See page 29 for further information on the Alternative 

Performance Measures (APMs), including definitions and 
a reconciliation of APMs to statutory measures.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

17

Providing answers... 

W2 Labs is focused on finding 
and implementing innovative 
ideas from a wider, global, 
market. We encourage start-ups 
to work with us and help us 
address some of our industry’s 
key issues.

W2 Labs Pitch day and  
Innovation day W2 Labs Pitch 
day, held at Digital Catapult, 
London and Innovation day 
held at CodeNode, London. 

18

Strategic reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019Last year, in the ‘Wincanton Guide to the Digitised Supply Chain’, we explored some of the trends and innovations transforming – or set to transform – our industry. Today, several of those products and services are simplifying and streamlining the way logistics works. For example, blockchain, robotics, 3D printing and a host of other technologies are hard at work in the supply chain... making, storing, packing, moving, tracking, tracing, unloading, delivering, returning, and managing all manner of goods, all around the world.   
As the Fourth Industrial Revolution 
becomes ever more pervasive, 
we decided to further explore digital 
transformation issues, which could 
offer us new perspectives, to create 
more opportunity. 

Adrian Colman 
Chief Executive

to deliver innovation now

 • Warehouse of the Future – if the High Street 
evolves and warehouses become the new 
storefronts, how will they operate?

 • Intelligent Decision Making – how can we get 
the best out of big data, predicting outcomes, 
monitoring quality and plotting demand?

 • And lastly, our wild card, Open Season – 

anything and everything is up for grabs in 
this category, but we are particularly interested 
in ideas focused on safety issues.

We will provide details on the outcome of 
this year’s W² Labs programme in next year’s 
Annual Report. 

Alternatively, you can follow progress at 
www.w2labs.com

Our collaboration with start-up Storekat, which 
first kicked off through the 2018 W² Labs 
programme, has already borne fruit with the 
launch of oneVASTwarehouse.com. This cloud-
based service directly connects buyers and 
sellers of warehouse space, accessing the spare 
space in our estate. 

For details see 
www.onevastwarehouse.com

TOGETHER, WE ARE MORE EFFECTIVE

Through the W² Partner Network, we are 
teaming up with selected businesses of all 
sizes, from inside and outside our industry 
– as well as with start-ups from the W² Labs 
programme – to innovate products and 
services that can impact the evolution of the 
supply chain. We are looking to work with 
these partners and provide solutions, learning 
and commercial opportunities. 

Read more about our partners at 
www.wincanton.co.uk/innovation/
w2-partner-network/

ACCELERATING INNOVATION INSIDE

While W² Labs and the W² Partner Network look 
to access the brightest thinking from outside 
Wincanton, the focus of the W² Ideas Accelerator 
is closer to home – harnessing the creativity and 
practical experience of our own teams to make 
our customers’ businesses even better.

As Britain’s largest third party logistics company, 
we are right at the centre of this change. 
We have a unique opportunity to connect 
the dots and join up the thinking to drive our 
industry forwards – safely, responsibly and with 
a total focus on customer service.

Here, we provide an update on some of the 
concepts and initiatives we outlined in last 
year’s publication.

W² LABS: A TEST-BED FOR 
THE INDUSTRY

Established in 2017, W² Labs is a logistics first... 
a test-bed that invites start-ups from around the 
world to come together with our experts and 
develop innovative solutions to some of the 
challenges faced by our industry.

Early in 2019, we welcomed the second cohort 
to W² Labs. These six start-ups were selected 
from 151 applications before undergoing an 
intensive 10-week incubation period, working 
alongside senior teams from Wincanton to test, 
refine and test again how their various solutions 
might work in our business. 

Their products and services are closely aligned 
with the four categories of the 2019 Digital Guide:

 • Maximum Visibility – in a world where every 

customer and consumer wants to know exactly 
where any item is, all of the time, how can we 
devise greater visibility across the supply chain?

19

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’  remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent  auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019 
...and asking the right questions

Our new ‘Transforming Logistics’ guide is a lot more than an overview 
of a number of technologies. We have turned the discussion around, 
from us to our customers – and instead of saying what we can do, 
we are challenging UK business leaders to ask a number of critical 
questions of their organisations. Once leaders have framed the 
questions, our aim is to help them navigate the digital challenges 
and arrive at the answers. 

20

Strategic reportWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019For those of us who have worked in 
the supply chain field for a long time, 
many of the ‘new’ digital technologies 
aren’t entirely novel... What’s different 
now is the rapid advancement and 
‘convergence’ of so many disruptive 
technologies, taking us into the next 
era of global economic opportunity. 

The Fourth Industrial Revolution 
World Economic Forum

to shape the future

The efficiency of the logistics sector has 
never been better, nor cost-effectiveness 
higher. But uncertainty is up too. Never mind 
wondering what next week will look like... 
what about tomorrow? Or later this afternoon?

As our CEO, Adrian Colman writes in the 
foreword, “The evolution of technology has 
not slowed down... The time for ‘optimisation’ 
is over, it is now all about transformation.”

But how will this transformation happen?  
And, specifically, how can we at Wincanton 
ensure that it benefits our customers and – 
just as importantly – our customers’ customers?

THE MAN OR THE WOMAN 
IN THE MIRROR

Why? How? Where? When? We are challenging 
leaders of companies of all sizes and in all 
sectors – those who are not our customers just 
as much as those who are – to ask themselves a 
series of thought-provoking questions around 
digital transformation across three simple but 
hugely important themes, which are:

#1 Seeing more 
The visibility imperative is all about inventory 
knowledge and certainty – knowing precisely 
what’s what and where it is at any given 
second. The data imperative highlights how 
having a culture based on big data can guide 
decision-making. 

#2 Upgrading work 
Cobots (i.e. collaborative robots) are on the rise. 
Easy to programme, inexpensive and designed 
to work alongside humans not replace them, 
cobots are key areas to think about in the 
automation imperative. 

But upgrading work is nevertheless impossible 
unless organisations embrace and understand 
the people imperative. Machines can be 
wonderful, but they are only as good as 
the people who specify, program and work 
with them. 

#3 Progressing business 
The sustainability imperative hinges around 
the proximity between the circular economy 
mindset and the digital economy mindset. 
How can technology drive innovation 
in sustainability goals? 

The agility imperative looks at how we can 
improve our ability to thrive on uncertainty. 
Is it possible to improve current practices 
while also developing novel solutions and 
totally new ways of working? 

IT IS ALL ABOUT THE MINDSET

The need to operate in the present, while 
keeping at least one eye on tomorrow 
calls for a new mindset. We refer to it as 
a ‘transformation mindset’. And it is based 
on one final question: is the leader ready 
to oversee a transition from fixed to flexible 
thinking? Once mindsets are changed, 
everything else will change too. 

FINDING OUT MORE 

The 2019 ‘Transforming Logistics – a Leader’s 
Guide’ can be downloaded from our website. 

www.wincanton.co.uk/innovation/
the-wincanton-guide-to-the-digitised-
supply-chain/

21

Strategic reportGovernanceDirectors’  remuneration reportDirectors’ reportIndependent  auditor’s reportAccountsWincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019Strategic report

CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY REPORT

Fulfilling our role at the heart of our industry –  
and in communities we serve nationwide

As the largest British 3PL, we have clear responsibilities and a 
valuable opportunity to make a real difference: to our people, 
to our local communities and to the environment. 

SUPPORTING OUR PEOPLE

Our teams play a significant but invisible role 
behind the scenes in the lives of people across 
the United Kingdom. Every day, they ensure 
that stores have their stock, that construction 
sites keep working and that the wheels of 
commerce keep turning. We deliver the milk 
and sugar for your coffee, the furniture for your 
home, the fuel for your car, and many more 
essential services too.

In short, our people are the unsung heroes 
who make many supply chains work smoothly, 
moving, storing and delivering goods as they 
travel from source to retailers, sites and homes 
across the United Kingdom. And in return we 
work hard to improve their lives.

We do everything we can to make sure our 
colleagues are safe at work and have the 
support they need to enjoy long and enjoyable 
careers, regardless of gender or background.

Creating a positive workplace
Created by our employees, our values express 
how we work with colleagues and customers 
alike. Every person at Wincanton, from 
boardroom to warehouse floor, live these 
values every day.

 • Excellence. At every level and in every task, 

we aim to be the best at what we do.

 • Integrity. We do the right things for the right 
reasons, to make the right call every time.

 • Passion. We love logistics and work 

diligently and with passion.

 • Proactivity. Every day, we seek 

opportunities to be one step ahead.

 • Trust. We rely on each other in good times 
and bad, whether the pressure is on or we’re 
just having fun.

 • Togetherness. We work as one team, 
collaboratively and without hidden 
agendas. We come together to help each 
other succeed.

A workplace that works for all
A progressive organisation operating in 
a sector that has been traditionally male-
oriented, we’ve already made great strides 
towards becoming a more diverse  
organisation. 

Gender pay and bonus gap
for 2018 Wincanton plc

Mean

Hourly pay gap

Median

Mean

Bonus pay gap

Median

8%

10%

47%

3%

As an organisation, we’re actively engaged 
in initiatives that promote a career in logistics 
to those in other under-represented groups. 
This means looking at issues beyond 
recruitment practices, and considering how 
factors such as scheduling and working 
patterns can play a part in encouraging and 
enabling more people to enjoy careers that fit 
with their lifestyles.

We recognise and embrace the benefits that 
a diverse workforce brings to our business 
and support our colleagues with equality 
and diversity training. We continue to support 
Everywoman, an organisation dedicated to 
developing female talent and advancing 
women in business, and also actively 
participate in logistics forums to highlight 
the opportunities that exist in the sector 
for women. 

We have also used our ongoing work with 
schools to promote logistics as a career option; 
showing the variety and opportunity that 
the industry offers to logistics professionals 
of the future. 

22

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

During the months ahead, we’ll continue to 
finalise unconscious bias training so that all our 
people have the awareness and tools to support 
the recruitment and development of individuals 
from all backgrounds and walks of life.

Developing our teams
Talent and management development is the 
key to our long-term future. We provide a 
range of established and new programmes 
which aim to fast-track our high potential 
people, ensuring that we get the best out of 
them and that they enjoy full and rewarding 
careers with Wincanton. 

During the year, we launched Elevate – a new 
learning, performance and talent management 
system that underpins our commitment to 
continually improve performance and provide 
learning and development opportunities for 
all. Elevate includes a new careers hub which 
provides our people with a comprehensive 
guide to career management as well as 
opportunities to arrange a one-to-one session 
with one of our internally-trained coaches. 

At the same time, we continue to work on 
developing our leaders – focusing on our core 
leadership behaviours of Bold, Curious and 
Engaging. We support our leaders with coaching, 
mentoring and development programmes to 
facilitate smooth succession for key roles. 

We also launched the ‘Drive the Difference’ 
initiative in the year. Targeted at our transport 
team leaders, this 12-month development 
programme focuses on the key skills and 

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

behaviours required to effectively manage 
teams. And it’s being delivered via face-to-face 
workshops, one-to-one coaching sessions and 
online learning modules.

Drivers are in short supply across the industry, 
and during the year we introduced a new 
scheme to enable new drivers to gain their 
licence and to also upskill from Class 1 to Class 2 
once they’ve joined us. The Professional Driver 
Programme was first launched in Bristol for 
B&Q and M&S home delivery services, and led 
to Wincanton being shortlisted in the ‘Large 
Employer of the Year’ category for the Bath & 
Bristol Apprenticeship Awards 2018.

New starters now benefit from a new 
onboarding process to help them feel at home 
and understand their roles and responsibilities. 

Warehousing is another area where our 
learning and development teams can make 
the difference between a job and a career. 

As well as receiving on the job training, 
warehouse colleagues are able to take 
advantage of warehouse apprenticeship 
programmes to support their development 
and career progression:

 • Supply chain warehouse operative – 
available to new starters with up to 
12 months’ experience.

 • Improving operational performance: 

Business improvement techniques level 
2 – available to colleagues with more 
than 12 months’ experience.

 • Operations and quality improvement: 

Business improvement techniques level 
3 – available to those with more experience 
and in step-up roles.

 • Engineering apprenticeships signal our 

commitment to grow talent for the future 
in areas such as automation and robotics.

These programmes are just a few of the 57 
apprenticeships we currently offer. As the 
financial year closed, 505 colleagues were 
taking part in apprenticeship programmes 
across all areas of the business, including our 
first engineering apprentices.

Engaging with our teams
Before we communicate with our people, we 
listen to their ideas. By understanding what 
they’re looking for from an employer, we can 
make sure we’re in a much better position to 
deliver it.

We use a range of approaches to capture what 
our people think, including holding listening 
group meetings with all our major employee 
stakeholders at sites, warehouses and offices. 
For example, our General Manager (GM) 
listening group brings together the individuals 
who are essential to delivering customer 
service. Chaired by a member of the Executive 
Management Team (EMT), these meetings 
cover a wide range of topics and give us 
valuable insight into the moods, unconscious 
behaviours and challenges associated with the 
GM population. Together, we work to develop 
and enhance new and existing programmes 
that will provide better customer service and 
buy in of our managers.

This year we continued to run our ‘Your Pulse’ 
employee engagement survey, which captures 
feedback about employees’ experiences of 
working with Wincanton. Carried out twice 
a year, the most recent survey reported an 
engagement score of 67% and a 4% increase 
in our participation rate to 72%. The findings 
from each survey are reviewed at all levels 
of the business and help shape our strategy. 
We were proud to donate £10,600 to the 
British Heart Foundation as a thank you to 
our colleagues for their participation.

In addition, we engage with our people via 
the W2 programme, particularly the W2 Ideas 
Accelerator which harnesses their creativity and 
practical experience to make our customers’ 
businesses even better.

Ensuring a safe workplace
Nothing is more important to us than the 
health and safety of our people. 

We use Lost Time Incident Frequency Rate 
(LTIFR) to measure our safety performance. 
Our LTIFR for the year is tracked weekly and 
we are pleased with our reduced rate of 0.51. 
We are working continuously to improve it. 
In addition, we also use other metrics to give us 
a broader and deeper insight into safety, such 
as days lost ratio and employer liability claims. 
Again, these are tracked weekly and reviewed 
regularly to identify areas where we can do 
better. We continue to encourage all employees 
to report anything they see which could be 
potentially hazardous or harmful, or could be 
improved, and any such incidents are reported 
as near-misses. We also use safety conversations 
across all levels of Wincanton, to provide both 
positive and negative feedback from our teams.

Among our driver population, we’ve again 
delivered many schemes to promote safety, 
both of our own employees and the public. 
For example, we track and monitor driving 
records, incidents and behaviours and regularly 
review the results – and we pay particular 
attention to the Collisions per Million Kilometres 
(CMK) metric as a measurement of our 
performance in these areas. Each driver is also 
provided with a Wincanton Driver’s Handbook, 
which sets out specific safety initiatives around 
driving and handling, such as details about our 
EVADE vulnerable road user programme which 
provides important guidance on safeguarding 
pedestrians and cyclists. 

For all employees, we provide an annual 
schedule of training on health and safety 
related topics. Managers also receive regular 
health, safety and environment training, while 
we implement initiatives through our Train-
the-Trainer scheme to target key risk areas. 
During the year, we trained a total of 2,500 
trainers. We also provide regular courses in risk 
assessment and accident investigation for first 
line managers. 

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

23

Strategic report

CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY REPORT CONTINUED

OUR ENVIRONMENTAL PRINCIPLES

We use ten environmental principles to help us identify and manage any potential impact of our business on the environment: 

1  Integrate 
We integrate 
environmental 
considerations into key 
business decisions. 

2  Develop 
We develop progressive 
products and 
services to assist our 
customers to improve 
their environmental  
performance. 

3  Management 
We ensure legal 
compliance and 
operational excellence 
through environmental 
management systems 
and employee training. 

4  Measure 
We monitor, measure and 
continuously improve 
our environmental  
performance. 

5  Communicate 
We communicate our 
progress to our customers, 
employees and investors. 

Our W2 Labs programme continues to bring 
innovative technology to our health and 
safety environment from wearable technology 
to improve posture, use of robotics and 
AI (Artificial Intelligence) to assist human 
performance, to using the latest telematics 
as a driver safety engagement tool. 

PLAYING OUR PART IN OUR 
LOCAL COMMUNITIES

Whether our team is badged ‘Wincanton’ 
or wearing the uniforms and delivering the 
brand promises of our customers, our more 
than 200 locations are important assets in local 
communities. As well as providing employment 
opportunities, we’re also committed to 
developing programmes that promote and 
encourage links between our business and 
the community. 

Each location’s sustainability plan includes 
community engagement and fundraising 
projects – and during the year we organised a 
wide range of such activities, from charity events 
and environmental projects to family fun days. 

We continued to work with schools during 
the year, with our Halfords team visiting eight 
schools and encouraging 1,150 children to 
be safe around trucks, by educating them on 
the dangers in a real life setting. Through the 
Children’s Health & Safety Around Trucks 
initiative, drivers on the Halfords contract ran 
an interactive session with pupils, showing the 
dangers of blind spots. 

At Trentham, our team transformed a derelict 
lot into a new sensory garden for local charity 
Free Spirits Daycare Centre, which works 
with young adults with learning and physical 
disabilities. The team cleared a large section 
of overgrown weeds, whitewashed walls, 
repainted an old storage container, and built 
planters and a mud kitchen as well as installing 
a wheelchair-accessible swing. 

Rather than promote one charity company-
wide, we believe in the importance of 
empowering our sites to make their own 
decisions on what local charities or fundraising 
ideas to support. Over the course of the 
year, our teams took part in a vast range of 
fundraising activities... from an ice bucket 
challenge in aid of Children in Need to dressing 
up as elves for the Alzheimer’s Society and 
organising Christmas toy appeals. 

PROTECTING OUR ENVIRONMENT

Responsibility for our environment programme 
sits with our Head of Sustainability and 
the HR Director who is a member of the 
Executive Management Team (EMT) – 
demonstrating the importance we place on 
our environment strategy. 

Our industry can have a significant impact 
on the environment, and we do all we can 
to minimise it. In addition to promoting 
sustainable logistics, we’ve also developed 
a rigorous environmental policy. This is 
supported by an environmental management 

The children got a lot out of your visit and 
really enjoyed learning about road safety. 
These are the lessons they always remember 
– being outside of the classroom and 
learning through real life experiences. 

Jane Pilling, 
Richard Lee School 

24

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

system and is cascaded throughout 
Wincanton, ensuring that all employees are 
fully aware of their roles and responsibilities. 

Comprehensive sustainability plans are in place 
for all our sites, depots and offices. These plans 
include projects designed to mitigate our 
environmental impact and ensure that we 
continue to move towards achieving our 
sustainability targets. In addition our senior 
management team receives regular reports 
on progress. 

A well-managed supply chain can play a key 
role in mitigating the impact of our customers’ 
activities as well as our own. So we share 
our knowledge and experience along the 
supply chain, for example, by identifying 
efficiencies, promoting collaborative working 
and by offering significant expertise and 
experience in managing environmentally 
sustainable logistics.

Through new technologies we are identifying 
opportunities to drive fewer miles, consume 
less fuel while maintaining performance. 
For example, applying data from our telematics 
technology to promote improved driver 
behaviour, shows how a smoother driver 
uses less fuel and generates fewer emissions; 
a comprehensive Transport Management 
System helps us better plan routes to reduce 
miles; and a rolling programme of fleet 
modernisation means we are driving the 
most efficient and highest performing fleet. 

Gaining recognition
Health & Safety Award, 
CILT Annual Award 2018 
We won the 2018 Health & Safety Award at 
the CILT Annual Awards for our work with 
Wickes. The CILT Annual Awards recognise 
achievement and reward the highest industry 
standards across logistics and transport. 
Our win in the Health & Safety category 
highlights the achievements of our business 
and, more specifically, our collaboration 
with Wickes. 

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

6  Carbon emissions 
We minimise the 
consumption of fossil fuels 
and associated emissions 
of carbon dioxide, and 
other greenhouse gases. 

7  Resources 
We minimise our 
consumption of 
non-renewable and 
environmentally 
sensitive resources. 

8  Waste 
We minimise the amount 
of waste produced 
through prevention,  
re-use and recycling. 

9  Pollution 
We prevent ground and 
water pollution and 
minimise emissions of 
airborne pollutants. 

10  Communication 
We minimise the negative 
impact of our activities 
on local communities 
and engage positively 
with them. 

Training Team of the Year, 
Talent in Logistics 2018
Our Health, Safety, Driver Training and 
Development Team for our Co-op contract 
won Training Team of the Year showing their 
commitment to continuously improve and 
strive for ‘best practice’ within Wincanton and 
promoting its industry leader status. The Talent 
in Logistics Awards was created to celebrate 
professionals at every level of learning and 
development, and reward those who are 
inspiring the next generation of logistics and 
transport talent.

Carbon Trust Standard
We’ve made significant progress in minimising 
our environmental impact, and this was again 
recognised during the year. We’ve held the 
Carbon Trust Standard since 2010, underlining 
the continuous and consistent reductions 
we’ve made to our carbon footprint – a 
particularly significant achievement in the 
context of our continuing growth. We were 
successfully assessed again in 2018 and will 
now retain the Standard until at least 2020.

For 2018, we were rated at ‘B’ by CDP, formerly 
the Carbon Disclosure Project, which runs 
the global disclosure system that enables 
companies, cities, states and regions to 
measure and manage their environmental 
impacts. Our rating indicates that we’re a 
company ‘managing carbon’. This score, up 
from a ‘B minus’ in 2017, demonstrates that 
we’re implementing actions, policies and 
strategies to address key issues and have 
achieved carbon reduction figures that 
reflect this.

Greenhouse gas emissions
Our environmental management system 
was reviewed and revised during 2017 
against the new ISO14001:2015 standard and 
this external certification was maintained 
during 2018. The system tracks our monthly 
operational emissions performance across 
a range of indicators – enabling us to take 
prompt corrective actions and to identify and 
exploit improvement opportunities wherever 
they arise. 

From an emissions reduction perspective, 
we launched or implemented many key 
projects, including: completing upgrades to 
LED lighting at three more sites; introducing 
further new fleet with enhanced cruise control, 
economy drive and predictive power train 
control features; and deploying our first electric 
vehicles on our two-man home delivery fleet. 
Our Trax Park LED lighting project won a Smart 
Solution Award and was shortlisted for a LUX 
Award in the ‘Industrial and Transport’ category.

Carbon emission information is prepared with 
reference to the Carbon Disclosure Standards 
Board (CDSB) Framework 1.1 and the GHG 
Protocol Corporate Standard for operational 
control. Carbon factors are per Defra/DECC 
conversion factors for company reporting 
2018, with both electricity generation and 
distribution emissions included as scope 2 
emissions. For all UK mainland operations 
where we have the supply contract, we 
continue to purchase ‘green’ tariff electricity 
which complies with the market-based scope 
2 reporting requirements of the GHG protocol. 
However, we have reported electricity use 
at UK grid average for the purposes of this 
Annual Report.

We record energy and fuel use for managed 
supplies, which includes all supplies that are 
wholly or partially managed at sites operated 
by our teams, either for ourselves or our 
customers, irrespective of whether the fuel 
and/or energy is purchased by us directly. 
The sources of emissions include: road 
transport fuels; fuels for non-road transport 
uses; energy utilities for buildings; and fuel for 
business travel in Wincanton-driven vehicles. 

We also include consumption of fluorinated 
refrigerant gases as a scope 1 emission and 
have not excluded any emissions sources 
regardless of materiality.

We participate in the UK CRC Energy Efficiency 
Scheme and all CRC qualifying emissions 
are included in our scope 1 and 2 carbon 
emissions figures. We complied with the 
UK Energy Saving Opportunities Scheme 
(ESOS) original 2015 deadline and utilised the 
costed energy saving measures in our internal 
environmental targets to 2020, to derive full 
value from the ESOS compliance process. 
We shall again comply with the second phase 
of ESOS during 2019. 

Reducing our carbon intensity ratio
We set absolute internal targets for carbon 
emissions reduction, and decouple emissions 
performance from business performance. 
However, as changes in our business activities 
directly affect our emissions, we use a carbon 
intensity measure to ensure we optimise our 
carbon efficiency.

Our carbon intensity is defined as total scope 
1 and 2 carbon emissions from managed 
supplies per unit of revenue, and our carbon 
intensity ratio for the year ended 31 March 2019 
was 295 tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent 
(tCO2e) per £m of revenue. This is a reduction 
year on year because whilst our revenue 
decreased, our carbon emissions reduced more 
because of increased transport fuel efficiencies, 
shifts to less carbon intensive activity and 
reductions in carbon factors for grid electricity. 

CARBON EMISSIONS TABLE

Carbon emissions (tCO2e)
Transport (scope 1)
Non-transport (scope 1 & 2)
Total emissions 
Carbon intensity (tCO2e/£m)

2018/191
290,470
45,327
335,797
295

2017/18
308,227
58,874
367,101
315

2016/17
287,020
72,458
359,478
320

2015/16
308,352
84,938
393,290
345

2014/15
304,747
82,631
387,378
350

2013/14
293,557
94,856
388,413
355

1  Figures correct as at the date of this report. 

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

25

Strategic report

FINANCIAL REVIEW

Providing resilience, 
certainty and sustainable 
growth for stakeholders.

Tim Lawlor 
Chief Financial Officer

The Directors present the results of the 
business on an underlying basis (excluding 
amortisation of acquired intangibles and 
exceptional items, the related tax and 
exceptional tax items) for operating profit, 
profit before tax and EPS where applicable, 
as they believe this better represents the 
performance of the business. A reconciliation of 
these measures to their statutory equivalent is 
shown in the table on page 29.

The Group’s revenue of £1,141.5m in the year 
ended 31 March 2019 was 2.6% lower than 
the prior year (2018: £1,171.9m). This reflects 
the net impact of contract losses in the prior 
year which have not yet been offset by the 
significant new business wins in the second 
half of the current year.

Group underlying operating profit

2019

2018

2017

2016

2015

55.3

52.9

52.1

48.7*

46.2*

30

35

40

45
(£m)

50

55

*  Excluding the results of Wincanton Records Management, 

which was disposed of in 2015/16.

Underlying operating profit grew by 4.5% to 
£55.3m as a result of an improved mix in the 
contract portfolio, together with the impact 
of performance improvement and cost 
management initiatives across the Group, 
including the benefits from restructuring actions 
taken last year. The exit in the prior year from 
certain contracts which were not capable of 
delivering appropriate operating margins for the 
Group has helped drive improvements in the 
Industrial & Transport sector in particular and, 
as a result, the Group’s underlying operating 
margin has increased to 4.8% (2018: 4.5%).

PERFORMANCE SUMMARY

Revenue (£m)
Underlying EBITDA (£m)
Underlying operating profit (£m)
Underlying operating margin (%)
Net financing costs (£m)
Underlying profit before tax (£m)
Amortisation of acquired intangibles (£m)
Exceptional items (£m)
Profit before tax (£m)
Income tax (£m)
Profit after tax (£m)
Underlying EPS
Basic EPS
Dividend per share 
Closing net debt (£m)

2019
1,141.5
66.7
55.3
4.8

(6.0)
49.3
–
(0.7)
48.6
(5.8)
42.8
33.5p
34.5p
10.89p
(19.3)

2018
1,171.9
64.8
52.9
4.5
(6.5)
46.4
(2.3)
(6.2)
37.9
(6.7)
31.2
30.8p
25.2p
9.90p
(29.5)

Change
(2.6)%
2.9%
4.5%
30bps

6.3%

28.2%

37.2%
8.8%
36.9%

(34.6)%

NET FINANCING COSTS

2019  
£m

2018  
£m

Net bank interest payable 
on loans
Unwinding of discount 
on provisions
Interest on the net defined 
benefit pension liability
Net financing costs

4.2

0.8

1.0
6.0

4.1

0.6

1.8
6.5

Net financing costs were £6.0m (2018: £6.5m), 
£0.5m lower year on year.

Bank interest payable on loans was £4.2m 
(2018: £4.1m), an increase of £0.1m reflecting 
the higher bank base rate year on year.

The non-cash financing items total £1.8m 
(2018: £2.4m) and comprise the discount 
unwinding on the Group’s provisions for 
property and insurance claims, which has 
increased primarily due to changes in the 

discount rate applied to insurance provisions; 
plus the financing charge in respect of the 
defined benefit deficit, which is significantly 
lower in the year due to a reduced opening 
deficit and a one-off lump sum contribution 
of £15.0m in the first half of the year.

EXCEPTIONAL ITEMS 

2019  
£m

2018  
£m

Net profit on disposal 
of freehold property
Pension scheme – Guaranteed 
Minimum Pension (‘GMP’)
Revision to property provisions 
previously recognised through 
exceptional items
Restructuring costs
Pension scheme liability 
management exercise
Net exceptional items

6.0

(8.2)

1.5
–

–
(0.7)

–

–

–
(8.2)

2.0
(6.2)

26

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

During the year we completed the disposal 
of a freehold property receiving gross sales 
proceeds of £14.5m and incurring costs of 
disposal and transitioning operations to 
another site of £1.2m and £0.5m respectively. 
The carrying value of the property was £6.8m 
generating a net profit on the disposal and 
transition of £6.0m.

On 26 October 2018, the High Court of Justice 
of England and Wales issued a judgement 
relating to Lloyds Banking Group requiring 
equality of treatment of historic pension 
benefits for men and women. We continue 
to work with the Trustee on the detail of 
implementing this judgement and have 
recognised a non-cash past service cost of 
£8.2m in the year. This is based on a number of 
assumptions and the final actual impact may 
be different.

The Group negotiated an exit from a long-
standing onerous property lease in Dublin on 
favourable terms during the course of the year. 
The full novation of this lease, partly offset by 
an increase in provision for another long-
standing lease, resulted in a net exceptional 
credit of £1.5m.

We undertook a restructuring programme in 
the prior year to competitively position the 
business for the future. A charge of £8.2m 
was included as an exceptional charge in 
the prior year principally comprising costs in 
relation to the exit of people and associated 
property costs.

The conclusion of the pension scheme liability 
management exercise in the prior year resulted 
in a settlement gain of £1.8m together with a 
release of £0.2m due to the actual costs of the 
exercise being lower than expected.

The effective tax rate of 15.9% is lower than 
the statutory rate of 19.0% due to adjustments 
arising from finalising prior year positions 
and tax credits related to pension payments. 
The exceptional tax credit of £2.0m in the 
year arises principally on recognition of a 
deferred tax asset in relation to the exceptional 
GMP charge.

The total net deferred tax asset has reduced 
to £4.2m (2018: £11.5m), primarily as a result of 
the reduction in the pension deficit and the 
deferred tax asset thereon. 

PROFIT AFTER TAX AND 
EARNINGS PER SHARE

Underlying profit before tax for the year 
increased to £49.3m (2018: £46.4m) due to 
improved operational performance in the year.

Underlying profit after tax for the year is 
£41.5m (2018: £38.1m). The increase of £3.4m 
is due to the improved underlying operating 
profit and the lower effective tax rate of 15.9% 
(2018: 18.0%).

Profit after tax for the year on a statutory basis 
is £42.8m (2018: £31.2m), the increase of £11.6m 
being due to improvements in underlying 
operating profit and net financing costs and 
higher exceptional costs in the prior year.

Underlying EPS, which excludes from earnings 
amortisation of acquired intangibles and 
exceptional items, increased by 8.8% to 33.5p 
(2018: 30.8p). Basic EPS was 34.5p (2018: 25.2p) 
with the increase again being explained by 
the lower exceptional costs in the year and the 
higher amortisation cost in the prior year.

The calculation of these EPS measures is set out 
in Note 8 to the financial statements.

TAXATION

DIVIDENDS

Underlying profit before 
tax (£m)
Underlying tax (£m)
Tax on amortisation of 
acquired intangibles (£m)
Exceptional tax (£m)
Tax as reported (£m)
Effective tax rate on 
underlying profit 
before tax (%)

2019

2018 

49.3
7.8

–
(2.0)
5.8

46.4
8.3

(0.4)
(1.2)
6.7

15.9% 18.0%

Underlying tax of £7.8m (2018: £8.3m) 
represents an effective tax rate of 15.9% 
(2018: 18.0%) on underlying profit before 
tax and is stated before tax credits of £nil 
(2018: £0.4m) in respect of the amortisation 
of acquired intangibles and net tax credits 
in respect of exceptional items of £2.0m 
(2018: £1.2m). 

Interim
Final (proposed)
Total

2019  
pence
3.60
7.29
10.89

2018  
pence 
3.27
6.63
9.90

In setting the dividend the Board considers a 
range of factors, including the Group’s strategy 
(including downside sensitivities), the current 
and projected level of distributable reserves 
and projected cash flows including cash 
payments to the pension scheme.

The Board has proposed a final dividend of 
7.29p per share for the year ended 31 March 
2019, an increase of 10.0% compared to 
the final dividend paid in respect of the 
year ended 31 March 2018. The dividend is 
approximately three times covered by earnings.

Dividend payments of £12.7m (2018: £11.6m) 
in the year comprised the final dividend of 
6.63p per share for the period ended 31 March 
2018 and the 2019 interim dividend of 3.60p 
per share.

FINANCIAL POSITION 

The summary financial position of the Group 
is set out below: 

Non-current assets
Net current liabilities  
(excl. net debt)
Non-current liabilities (excl. 
net debt/pension deficit)
Net debt 
Pensions deficit  
(gross of deferred tax)
Net liabilities 

2019  
£m
122.9

2018  
£m
136.0

(133.2)

(136.4)

(30.4)
(19.3)

(33.1)
(29.5)

(7.1)
(67.1)

(49.5)
(112.5)

The reduction in net liabilities of £45.4m is 
represented by the profit after tax of £42.8m, 
the continued reduction of the pension 
deficit net of deferred tax of £16.8m, less 
dividends paid in the year of £12.7m and other 
movements in equity of £1.5m.

CASH FLOWS AND NET DEBT

The Group delivered a £10.2m movement 
in net debt (2018: £5.2m outflow) in the 
year, with a free cash inflow before capital 
expenditure of £52.9m (2018: £39.0m) and 
a free cash flow of £57.0m (2018: £25.0m). 
Free cash flow is defined as the movement in 
net debt, before pension payments, dividends 
and the acquisition of own shares. 

Underlying EBITDA
Working capital
Tax
Net interest
Other items
Free cash flow before 
capital expenditure
Capital expenditure
Net proceeds from 
asset disposals
Free cash flow
Pension recovery payment
Pension liability 
management exercise
Dividends
Own shares acquired
Reduction/(increase) 
in net debt

2019  
£m
66.7
0.8
(1.5)
(4.2)
(8.9)

52.9
(9.7)

13.8
57.0
(32.3)

–
(12.7)
(1.8)

2018  
£m
64.8
(8.3)
(4.0)
(4.1)
(9.4)

39.0
(14.5)

0.5
25.0
(14.6)

(2.2)
(11.6)
(1.8)

10.2

(5.2)

Working capital was broadly flat over the course 
of the year, with an inflow of £0.8m (2018: £8.3m 
outflow). The prior year movement was primarily 
due to investment in mobilising new contracts. 

The Group paid cash tax in the current year 
of £1.5m (2018: £4.0m) with the reduction 
compared to the prior year driven by the 
tax benefits from a one-off contribution to 
the pension fund of £15.0m in August 2018. 
The cash tax payable continues to trend below 

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

27

Strategic report

FINANCIAL REVIEW CONTINUED

the underlying charge primarily due to the 
impact of tax relief on the pension deficit 
recovery payments made in the year.

The amount of cash net interest paid, excluding 
fees, of £4.2m (2018: £4.1m) increased marginally 
in the year, reflecting the increase in the bank 
base rate year on year.

Other items represent payments in relation to 
exceptional items, including restructuring costs 
provided for in the prior year, movements on 
property provisions, including onerous lease 
and dilapidations payments, and movements 
in other provisions. 

Capital expenditure of £9.7m (2018: £14.5m) 
includes investment in IT systems including the 
enhancement of our transport management 
system and warehouse management 
system implementations.

Net proceeds from asset disposals comprise 
an under-utilised freehold property which was 
disposed of for gross proceeds of £14.5m, with 
costs of disposal and transition of £1.2m and 
£0.5m respectively and proceeds from other 
asset disposals of £1.0m (2018: £0.5m). 

The cash contribution to fund the pension 
deficit of £32.3m comprises £18.0m of 
annual deficit contributions, less £0.7m of 
administrative expenses incurred by the 
Company, plus a one-off lump sum payment 
of £15.0m. Contributions for the year ended 
31 March 2020 are expected to be £17.7m, 
being the annual deficit contribution of £18.4m 
less the administrative costs incurred directly 
by the Company.

Equity dividends of £12.7m (2018: £11.6m) were 
paid in the year up 9.5% from the prior year.

The Group acquired 600,000 of its own shares 
(2018: 850,000) during the year for a total 
payment of £1.5m (2018: £1.8m) to provide 
shares for the Employee Benefit Trust in respect 
of its long term incentive plan commitments. 
In addition, £0.3m (2018: £nil) was paid at the 
beginning of the year in respect of shares 
acquired immediately before the previous 
year end.

Closing net debt

FINANCING AND COVENANTS

The Group has a committed syndicated 
bank facility of £141m as at 31 March 2019 
(2018: £141m) and the headroom between this 
facility and reported net debt at 31 March 2019 
was £122m (2018: £112m). The Group also has 
operating overdrafts and a Receivables Purchase 
Facility with Santander UK plc which provide 
day to day flexibility, amounting to a further £8m 
and £50m respectively in uncommitted facilities. 
£4.2m of the Receivables Purchase Facility was 
utilised as at 31 March 2019.

The Group was successful in amending its 
syndicated bank facility during the year, 
extending the term by an additional two years 
to October 2023 and removing the mandatory 
prepayments of £8.8m previously due in 
October 2019 and October 2020. 

Committed facilities

141

141

141

141

141

2023

2022

2021

2020

2019

40

80
(£m)

120

160

19

0

Closing net debt

The Group maintains a swap instrument 
to give an appropriate level of protection 
against changes in interest rates. At the year 
end, £20m of debt was at fixed rates and 
the balance at floating rates.

Wincanton operates comfortably within 
its banking covenants, as summarised in 
the table below: 

Covenant 
Ratio
Adjusted net debt: EBITDA <2.75:1

Interest cover
Fixed charge cover

>3.5:1
>1.4:1

At 31 
March 
2019
0.67

18.3
3.3

2019

2018

2017

2016

2015

0

20

40

(£m)

60

19.3

29.5

24.3

39.5

57.6

PENSIONS

The Group operates a number of pension 
arrangements in the UK and Ireland.

Defined benefit arrangements 
The Wincanton plc Pension Scheme 
(the Scheme) includes defined benefit 
sections which were closed to future 
accrual on 31 March 2014.

The membership data split by key categories 
is as follows:

Deferred
Pensioners

2019
7,102
5,887
12,989

2018 
7,404
5,810
13,214

During the year the Company reached an 
agreement with the Trustee on the 2017 
triennial valuation and recovery plan. The net 
annual deficit contributions have been agreed 
at £17.3m per annum increasing by RPI over 
the three years to March 2021 and £24.3m per 
annum increasing by RPI from April 2022 to 
March 2027. In addition, the Company made 
a one-off contribution of £15.0m in August 
2018. These payments are deductible for UK 
corporation tax purposes in the year they are 
paid and therefore materially reduce the net 
cash impact of the contributions to the Group. 

At 31 March 2019, the Group has reported an 
IAS 19 deficit of £7.1m (2018: £49.5m).

The deficit has reduced primarily due to 
cash contributions of £32.3m in the year, 
comprising the lump-sum payment of £15.0m 
and the agreed annual payment of £17.3m. 
The remainder of the movement is primarily 
due to favourable movements in demographic 
assumptions which have resulted in a 
reduction in liabilities of approximately £25m, 
partly offset by an £8.2m increase in liabilities in 
respect of Guaranteed Minimum Pensions. 

On 26 October 2018, the High Court of Justice 
of England and Wales issued a judgment 
relating to Lloyds Banking Group requiring 
equality of treatment of historic pension 
benefits for men and women (Guaranteed 
Minimum Pensions). We continue to work with 
the Trustee on the detail of implementing this 
judgement, and have recognised a past service 
cost of £8.2m as an estimate of this impact. 
This is based on a number of assumptions and 
the final actual impact may be different.

The interest and inflation rate risks facing the 
Scheme are hedged and the Trustee has 
maintained the level of this hedge during 
the year to 100% of the Scheme’s assets. 
The discount rate for calculating liabilities 
has reduced by 0.2% compared to the prior 
year and on the IAS 19 basis of measurement, 
each 0.1% reduction in the rate increases the 
liabilities of the Scheme by approximately £22m. 
However, due to the hedging in place, assets 
would also increase by approximately £24m.

Over recent years, the Trustee has pursued 
a diversification of the investment portfolio 
as part of a de-risking strategy, and this 
programme continued in the year ended 
31 March 2019. As at 31 March 2019 the 
Scheme’s investments were split between 
31.0% in return-seeking assets and 69.0% 
in defensive assets. 

Defined contribution arrangements
The Group’s defined contribution arrangements 
include the Retirement Savings Section including 
the Auto Enrolment section, and the Pension 
Builder Plan in the UK and a separate similar local 
scheme in Ireland. Active membership of these 
schemes was 15,661 (2018: 15,728) in the year. 
The charge incurred for these arrangements 
totals £24.6m (2018: £19.0m).

28

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

BREXIT

 • Most of our existing contracts have 

IFRS 16

Although uncertainty remains as to the 
outcome of the UK’s proposed withdrawal 
from the European Union (“Brexit”), our 
understanding of potential risks and impacts 
are being regularly reviewed and assessed.

We have, for example, reviewed the potential 
impact of Brexit, including adverse economic 
consequences, on our existing contract base, 
workforce, bidding activities and supply chain.

We do not believe that Wincanton will be 
materially affected by the UK withdrawing 
from the European Union. This is based on the 
following key points:

 • Our operations are generally delivered locally 
in-country and are not critically dependent 
on a cross-border supply chain or workforce. 
Wincanton’s operations in Ireland are not a 
significant part of the Group and represent 
c. 1% of Group revenue.

 • As a UK-focused logistics business there 
is potential for additional demand for 
our services under most Brexit scenarios, 
including demand for warehouse space and 
management, management of bonded 
goods and supply of container storage 
and transportation.

provisions which allow for inflationary 
and other adjustments (e.g. fuel price 
movements) to be charged to our customers 
and 60% of our contracts are open book 
contracts in which we do not bear the direct 
impact of increasing costs.

 • A ‘hard’ Brexit without a transition period 
and/or an orderly withdrawal may cause 
regulatory and compliance uncertainty on 
some contracts that require performance 
under EU regulation, bodies and/or 
standards; however, we believe such 
uncertainties will be addressed under 
proposed new UK regulations following 
any withdrawal.

 • Tariffs may affect the procurement of certain 
goods, such as vehicles. In most instances, 
increases in the cost of imported vehicles 
would be included in prices charged 
to customers.

 • We have reviewed our supply chain and are 
broadly comfortable with our key suppliers’ 
ability to maintain the provision of goods 
and services on key contracts.

IFRS 16 Leases was issued by the IASB in January 
2016 and becomes effective for the Group 
for the year ended 31 March 2020. IFRS 16 
sets out the principles for the recognition, 
measurement, presentation and disclosure of 
leases for both lessees and lessors. The Group 
intends to apply IFRS 16 on 1 April 2019 using 
the modified retrospective approach; the 
cumulative effect of initial adoption being 
recognised as an adjustment to the opening 
balance of retained earnings as at 1 April 
2019 with no restatement of comparative 
information. The Group expects to recognise 
right-of-use assets of approximately £130m 
and lease liabilities of approximately £150m on 
1 April 2019, together with a deferred tax asset 
of approximately £2m. There is no cash impact 
of adopting IFRS 16.

The final impact of IFRS 16 in the period of 
initial application will depend on a number 
of factors including new leases agreed 
in the period, the estimated lease term, 
extensions and termination agreements 
and economic conditions. 

ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE MEASURES

Alternative performance measures (APMs) are used by the Board to assess the Group’s performance and are applied consistently from one period 
to the next. They therefore provide additional useful information for shareholders on the underlying performance and position of the Group. 
Additionally, underlying profit before tax is used in determining annual bonus payments and underlying EPS is used as a key performance indicator 
for the Long Term Incentive Plan. These measures are not defined by IFRS and are not intended to be a substitute for IFRS measures.

The Group presents underlying EBITDA, operating profit, profit before tax and EPS which are calculated as the statutory measures stated before 
amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional items, including related tax and exceptional tax items where applicable. The table below 
reconciles the APMs to the statutory reported measures.

Revenue (£m)
EBITDA (£m)3
Operating profit (£m)
Operating margin (%)
Net financing costs (£m)
Profit before tax (£m)
Income tax (£m)
Profit after tax (£m)
Earnings per share4
Dividend per share
Closing net debt (£m)5

Amortisation  
of acquired 
intangibles1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Exceptional 
items2
–
0.7
0.7
–
–
0.7
(2.0)
(1.3)

Statutory
1,141.5
66.0
54.6
4.8

(6.0)
48.6
(5.8)
42.8
34.5p
10.89p

2019

Underlying
1,141.5
66.7
55.3
4.8

(6.0)
49.3
(7.8)
41.5
33.5p
10.89p
(19.3)

Amortisation 
of acquired 
intangibles1
–
–
2.3
0.2
–
2.3
(0.4)
1.9

Exceptional 
items2
–
6.2
6.2
0.5
–
6.2
(1.2)
5.0

Statutory
1,171.9
58.6
44.4
3.8
(6.5)
37.9
(6.7)
31.2
25.2p
9.9p

2018

Underlying
1,171.9
64.8
52.9
4.5
(6.5)
46.4
(8.3) 
38.1 
30.8p
9.9p
(29.5)

1  Acquired intangibles were fully amortised at 31 March 2018 and therefore there is no amortisation required for the year ended 31 March 2019.

2  Notes 4 and 7 to the financial statements provide further detail of exceptional items and also includes any tax releases/credits that are classed as exceptional.

3  EBITDA refers to operating profit before depreciation and amortisation and is reconciled in Note 3 to the financial statements. EBITDA is not a statutory measure, but is included in the table 

above for completeness.

4  Note 8 to the financial statements provides further detail of underlying earnings per share.

5  Net debt is the sum of cash and bank balances, bank loans and overdrafts and other financial liabilities. Note 27 to the financial statements provides a breakdown of net debt for the current 

and prior periods.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

29

Strategic report

RISK REPORT

PRINCIPAL RISKS AND 
UNCERTAINTIES

This report, incorporated within the Strategic 
report, sets out how the Group manages risk 
by explaining the controls, risk management 
system and the Group’s key principal risks 
and uncertainties. The key principal risks 
are those risks that are considered material 
and could have a significant impact on the 
Group’s activities. 

Risk governance
The Group faces a diverse range of risks and 
uncertainties which could have an adverse 
effect on its success if not managed. To address 
these the Group designed and embedded 
a risk management system to identify and 
monitor all relevant current and potential risks 
and uncertainties, and to develop mitigation 
plans to reduce the likelihood and/or impact of 
the risks to the lowest extent possible.

Operational oversight and application of risk 
management in the Group is the responsibility 
of the Executive Management Team (EMT). 
Independent oversight and monitoring is 
undertaken by the Board’s Audit Committee, 
on behalf of the Board. Both the EMT and Audit 
Committee consider risk as a routine agenda 
item at their respective meetings. This ensures 
that sufficient time is allocated to consideration 
of the effectiveness of risk management 
and identification of any areas that could be 
further strengthened. 

The internal risk and control environment is 
reviewed by Internal Audit throughout the 
year, and their findings are reported to the 
Audit Committee. The Audit Committee makes 
recommendations to the Board, or determines, 
within the remit of its authority, any remedial 
actions or alterations to the risk management 
and control environment to ensure it remains 
up-to-date and fit for purpose.

Risk responsibility and assessment
Ultimate responsibility for setting the Group’s 
risk appetite and the effective management of 
risk sits with the Board.

The Board believes that the risk management 
system provides sufficient information and 
assurance on the key risks and uncertainties 
faced by the Group and facilitates informed 
decision-making on strategic, commercial and 
financial matters.

Acting within authority delegated by the 
Board, the Audit Committee has delegated 
oversight of risk management and the 
control environment, which is the day to day 
responsibility of the EMT.

Full details of the Audit Committee’s remit can 
be found in the Corporate Governance section 
on pages 41 to 43.

Risk management system
The risk management system comprises three 
integrated risk management components: 
a working committee; risk registers at both 
Group and business unit level; and a controls 
assessment programme.

Risk Management Committee
The Risk Management Committee (RMC) is an 
internal working committee set up to oversee 
second level assurance. The RMC maintains 
an up-to-date view on the current and 
prospective risks relevant to the Group and its 
macro environment, monitors the effectiveness 
of the control environment, and identifies 
improvements to controls and processes to 
reduce risks to the lowest level of acceptability.

The RMC reports to the EMT and Audit 
Committee on the current risk profile of the 
Group and progress on risk mitigation towards 
target risk levels set. The RMC seeks to meet 
at least five times per year and is comprised of 
EMT representation, business unit leadership 
and heads of support functions including 
Internal Audit. This composition of senior 
management represents all significant risk 
areas within the Group, provides a collective 
oversight of the whole Group, and has the 
level of influence and empowerment to 
embed risk management behaviours and 
implement or change controls. The RMC has 
oversight responsibility for: Group, business 
and function risk registers; risk controls 
and processes (such as Group policies and 
business procedures); and business continuity 
arrangements throughout the Group, including 
disaster recovery. 

The Head of Internal Audit attends RMC 
meetings and provides updates on findings 
of reviews by Internal Audit to ensure any 
potential concerns or actions are shared 
so they can be addressed and monitored 
to completion.

During the course of the year, there was a 
process to review the activities of the RMC. 
Supported by external professional advisers, 
this process involved reviewing the Group’s 
‘three lines of defence’ framework for risk 
management, assessing the effectiveness 
of assurance activities and reviewing 
the approach and composition of the 
RMC. The recommended changes were 
implemented during the year. To continue 
to enhance its role, further activity is planned 
during the 2019/20 financial year to develop the 
mechanisms to respond to adjustments in the 
Group’s priorities and business transformation. 

Risk registers
The Group has compiled and maintains a 
Group risk register of the significant risks at 
Group level. Risk registers specific to business 
unit and support functions are maintained 
by senior management responsible for those 
areas. Each risk register has been compiled 
following comprehensive assessment of the 
Group and its competitive environment. 
Appropriate responses and controls for all risks 
have been determined to, where possible, 
eliminate, but more usually mitigate, the impact 
and likelihood of the risks. 

Mitigation may include the introduction of 
additional controls, changes in procedures, 
increased insurance cover and commercial 
changes, along with other actions. The Group 
risk register is reviewed and monitored at each 
meeting of the RMC and is then submitted, 
along with any proposed amendments, to 
the EMT for consideration, followed by the 
Audit Committee. 

Control assessment
The Group operates an annual programme 
which requires all business sites to complete 
an assessment on their application of controls 
and processes at site level. The completed 
assessments are submitted to Internal Audit 
who then follow up any issues of concern 
and may incorporate areas for further 
investigation into the scope of their Internal 
Audit assignments; and/or notify the RMC of 
any issues or remedial actions that need to 
be addressed and completed. Internal Audit 
report on the outcome of all submitted 
control assessments to each Audit Committee 
meeting throughout the year.

The RMC has continued to use the Risk 
Management Tool, which was introduced 
at the start of the financial year, to enable 
the business to assess and measure areas 
of risk. The RMC has further developed the 
Risk Management Tool to allow areas of best 
practice to be recognised which the business 
areas and operations, in turn, are encouraged 
to implement. The Risk Management Tool 
involves an element of peer review. This is a 
key strength of the Risk Management Tool 
and enables multiple concurrent benefits: 
development of internal review skills within the 
Group; spread of knowledge of the Group’s 
business activities; and a further degree of 
independent measurement to support the 
Internal Audit function.

30

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

VIABILITY STATEMENT

In accordance with provision C.2.2 of the 2016 revision of UK Corporate Governance Code, the 
Directors have assessed the viability of the Group over a three-year period to 31 March 2022, 
taking into account the Group’s current position and the potential financial and operational 
impact of the principal risks documented on pages 32 and 33 of the Annual Report, in 
severe but plausible scenarios. In making their assessment, the Board carried out a robust 
assessment of the principal risks facing the Group, including those that would threaten its 
business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity.

The Directors have determined that a three-year period to 31 March 2022 is an appropriate 
period over which to provide its Viability Statement. This is the period reviewed by the 
Board in the annual planning process, and for which forecasting assumptions are used. 
We believe that this presents the Board and readers of the Annual Report and Accounts 
with a reasonable degree of confidence over the longer term outlook.

Scenarios tested include those impacting:

 • business continuity, including strategic or critical supplier failure and failure of a critical 

IT system;

 • growth and retention, including loss of a major customer, rolling contracts and fixed 

contracts up for renewal, as well as a reduction in new wins;

 • operational performance, including contracts becoming onerous, labour costs increasing 

and inability to recruit and retain talents; and

 • an increase in the pension deficit and funding obligations.

Reverse stress testing, involving sensitivity matrices, has also been performed, taking into 
account the Group’s current financial position and external funding in place over the three-
year period. The impact of the various scenarios has been modelled and applied to the 
Group’s cash flows and debt requirements, banking covenants and minimum headroom over 
the period. None of these scenarios threaten the viability of the Group whether individually 
or in aggregate. In severe but plausible scenarios, mitigating actions such as tighter cost 
control or a reduction in dividend payments would be introduced. We will continue to 
evaluate any additional risks which emerge and might impact the business model.

Based on this assessment, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company 
and the Group will be able to continue in operation and meet liabilities as they fall due over 
the period to 31 March 2022. 

This statement was approved by the Board on 15 May 2019.

On behalf of the Board

Raj Sharma
Company Secretary
15 May 2019

Business continuity planning
The Group maintains detailed Business 
Continuity Plans (BCP) for all sites and offices, 
which are dovetailed with customers’ plans 
where necessary, to ensure an immediate 
and appropriate response to incidents. 
The rolling review of the quality and testing of 
all BCPs is undertaken at both site and Group 
level. The results of the review and testing 
programme are reported to the RMC, who 
maintain oversight on behalf of the EMT.

During the year, the Group has continued with 
its IT disaster recovery migration for business 
applications and services. Scenario testing was 
undertaken at disaster recovery sites and found 
to be effective. 

Whistleblowing 
The Group has in place a whistleblowing 
policy and procedure for all employees and 
other entitled individuals, to report concerns. 
The policy sets out the standards expected 
of all those it legally applies to and a clear 
procedure for raising concerns in strict 
confidence. The policy emphasises that 
anyone following the correct procedure and 
raising concerns in good faith is protected 
from recourse. 

In the event of a concern, employees are 
encouraged to first talk to their line manager 
or contact the HR team directly, if appropriate 
and they feel able to. When this is not possible 
or appropriate, employees can raise concerns 
directly to the Whistleblowing Officer or call an 
independent, external whistleblowing hotline, 
provided by Expolink. All calls to Expolink 
can be made on a named or anonymous 
basis. Reports of concerns are always treated 
in strict confidence and investigations are 
overseen, if appropriate, by the Company 
Secretary, the Chief Financial Officer and the 
Group HR Director. This ensures a thorough, 
fair and transparent process is undertaken 
and any actions are identified and addressed. 
A Whistleblowing Register is maintained and 
monitored, and is regularly reviewed by the 
Audit Committee. 

General Data Protection Regulations 
(GDPR) 
Wincanton has a data protection competency 
centre which is underpinned by robust 
governance and processes and supported by 
policies and procedures that are compliant 
with the GDPR and Data Protection Act 2018. 

The data protection team led by our Data 
Protection Officer, Marcos Hart, Group 
Transformation and Risk Director, undertakes 
training of all Wincanton employees, 
administration of policies and procedures, 
supplier compliance and the management 
and oversight of requests for information, 
data subject requests, data protection impact 
assessments and data protection incidents. 

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

31

Strategic report

RISK REPORT CONTINUED

PRINCIPAL RISKS OF THE GROUP

RISK AND IMPACT

CONTROLS AND MITIGATION

Significant 
health, safety or 
environmental 
incident

Pension deficit

The Group operates in environments which 
have the potential to be hazardous to people 
or property if not actively managed. A failure 
to manage these risks properly could result 
in injury or death of people and/or damage 
to property and the environment. Should an 
event occur it could lead to regulatory action, 
fines, withdrawal of licences, site closures 
and damage to the Group’s reputation. 
All of which have the potential to impact the 
Group’s ability to win and do business.

The Group has a significant deficit on 
its Defined Benefit pension scheme. 
The employer contribution levels required 
to eliminate this deficit, and the pension 
deficit itself, are subject to: financial market 
conditions, global economic and political 
matters, demographic factors, expected 
future investment returns and the legal and 
regulatory environment. Significant adverse 
changes in any of those factors could 
materially alter the deficit value and lead to 
a material change in cash contributions, a 
change to the repayment period, regulatory 
intervention, or a combination thereof. 
These changes could impact the cash flow 
and profitability of the Group and restrict its 
ability to invest in the business, pay dividends 
and repay debt. 

Recruitment and 
retention

The inability to recruit and retain employees, 
from drivers and warehouse operatives to 
executive talent, is considered a principal 
risk. Failure to retain people with the right 
skills, competencies, values and behaviours 
needed to operate and grow the business 
would impact the long term success of 
the Group.

The Group has detailed health and safety procedures and processes 
in place and employs health and safety teams at all business locations. 
The local team and operations are then monitored by a second-
line central health and safety team. The Group undertakes regular 
training and assessment programmes, monitors business records and 
completion of risk self-assessments, analyses all ‘near miss’ reporting 
and undertakes routine audits and investigations if felt necessary. 
Health, safety and environmental data and reporting are provided to 
business management and leadership to manage and achieve target 
business performance.

The Group has undertaken steps to mitigate the risk exposure of 
financial market movements and economic and political conditions. 
At the end of the year ended 31 March 2014, the Defined Benefit (DB) 
section of the Scheme was closed to future accrual to cap the risk. 

The Group maintains a strong working relationship with the 
Trustee, who is responsible for managing the fund and setting the 
investment strategy. The investment strategy is intended to reduce 
the investment risk through an appropriate level of matching between 
assets and liabilities in the Scheme. In the past three years, the level 
of hedging has been increased to significantly reduce the impact of 
inflation and interest rate movements. The Group and the Trustee 
engage high quality external fund managers and actuaries, and have 
separate legal, covenant and audit advisers to support and inform 
their decision-making.

The Group and the Trustee have run liability management exercises to 
reduce the overall liability risk in the Scheme, including the Enhanced 
Transfer Value exercise concluded during the year ended 31 March 
2018. Further liability management exercises will be considered in 
future years.

The triennial valuation of the Scheme for 31 March 2017 was 
concluded in August 2018. The Group and the Trustee have agreed an 
appropriate level of annual contributions to the Scheme and recovery 
period together with contingency plans to protect the Scheme in 
the event of adverse developments. The objective remains to ensure 
the deficit is eliminated over a reasonable period whilst ensuring that 
the recovery plan contributions are affordable and sustainable for the 
Group. The recovery period, level of contributions and contingency 
plans will be reviewed following the next triennial valuation which is 
due on 31 March 2020.

The Group has a strong and highly capable human resources 
function to monitor and maintain a high standard of recruitment and 
a regular appraisal process, based on key competencies. The Group 
constantly reviews and refreshes strategies and processes for 
recruitment and retention, such as the driver recruitment strategy 
which monitors driver vacancies and pipeline. The Group also has 
established relationships with preferred agencies to provide additional 
contingency. Talent and development are monitored and supported 
by a dedicated team to ensure people at all levels have access to our 
comprehensive training programme and development opportunities. 
Rewards are benchmarked to ensure they remain competitive and 
an annual employee engagement survey is undertaken and tracked 
as a KPI. The Board and Nomination Committee closely monitor and 
review the Board, executive and senior management strategies for 
succession planning and review the Group’s talent pool on a regular 
basis. The Group and the Board are mindful of the potential impact 
of Brexit on current and future employees, and are actively engaging 
with our EU national colleagues to keep them informed and aware of 
their rights. The Group is also part of the EU settled status pilot and is 
supporting its colleagues through that process.

32

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

Significant 
changes to 
market sectors 
and operating 
environments

Cyber security

Legacy IT solutions

Legal and  
regulatory  
compliance

Key suppliers

RISK AND IMPACT

CONTROLS AND MITIGATION

The Group provides services in a competitive 
and complex environment, with large 
and sophisticated customers within both 
its Industrial & Transport and its Retail & 
Consumer sectors. The Group faces into 
commercial pressures to renew and win 
business with acceptable levels of margin 
in order to deliver sustainable growth and 
returns. These pressures may stem from:

 • changes in customer appetite for 

outsourcing services;

 • strategic or behavioural changes in 
the competition, which may impact 
market pricing;

 • new disruptors, in particular the emergence 

of new technologies.

The Group closely monitors its strategic and operational performance 
through its KPIs (set out on page 17) and regularly reviews: market 
opportunities and threats, sector strategies, the sales pipeline, business 
optimisation programmes, innovation and solutions development, 
bespoke business propositions, and the talent development and 
retention strategies.

In addition to annual customer surveys, the business maintains 
key customer account plans to consider current and future 
needs, alongside the tracking of service, financial and operational 
contractual performance.

The Board and EMT are closely monitoring the developments on 
Brexit to determine if it could impact the market sectors the Group 
operates within, and any potential impact on customers and suppliers. 
A number of mitigating actions have been developed to address the 
potential risks, including management of stock levels of high volume 
consumables such as vehicle parts and fuel. 

The Group is aware of the increasing 
prevalence of cyber security attacks targeted 
at business. A cyber-incident could potentially 
impact the Group’s operational performance 
and reputation through the application of 
penalties, fines and/or regulatory action.

The Group routinely assesses the cyber risk landscape and has 
established layered proactive and reactive information security 
controls to mitigate common threats. Controls including information 
and process assurance, vulnerability management, penetration 
testing, regular audits, routine access reviews and risk management 
are defined, established and mature.

The Group relies upon secure and highly-
available IT solutions to operate the business 
and that of its customers. The potential loss 
of IT solution availability and increased risk 
of data breach through using outdated 
legacy technologies could have contractual 
implications leading to penalties, fines and/or 
regulatory action. 

The Group must comply with an extensive 
range of regulation and legislation in order to 
provide its services and solutions. Failure to 
comply to the required standards could 
lead to significant legal and regulatory 
actions, sanctions, removal of licences and 
permits, penalties and fines, and could result 
in reputational damage to the Group and 
potential harm to its employees or property.

As a large supply chain organisation, the 
Group is reliant on strong and reliable 
relationships with key suppliers and has 
obligations to comply with the Modern 
Slavery Act 2015. Failure to comply with 
regulations and have robust contractual 
arrangements with its largest suppliers 
could have significant financial and 
reputational impacts on the Group and its 
business performance.

The Group has a developed IT strategy and obtained the investment 
needed for the phased refreshment of critical IT solutions. The Group 
has invested significantly in a replacement Transport Management 
System, are enhancing eCommerce propositions and routinely work 
with established software technology providers to add value and 
drive competitive advantage.

Policies and procedures are in place throughout all areas of the Group 
to ensure systems, business and central operations all comply with 
relevant areas of legislation and compliance. The RMC maintain and 
monitor an internal legal and regulatory tracker to identify current 
and emerging legislation and determine any impact it may have to 
the Group and its policies, controls, communications and training that 
may need to be provided to Group employees. Second-line testing 
is undertaken by central functions to review the operation of controls 
and their effectiveness, including annual review of Group policies 
internally as well as a second review by external advisers.

The Group mitigates these risks through well established financial 
and internal control processes managed by central and operational 
finance teams and a large and experienced Procurement function. 
The Group reviews the financial stability and suitability of suppliers 
and requires they adhere to the Group’s policies and ethical standards. 
Regular supplier account management meetings take place to review 
performance. As noted above any potential Brexit impact is being 
closely monitored.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

33

Governance

THE BOARD

Dr. Martin Read CBE

Adrian Colman

Chairman
Chairman of the Nomination Committee and 
Member of the Remuneration Committee
Martin joined Wincanton as Chairman in August 2018. He is 
also chairman of the UK Government’s Senior Salaries Review 
Body. Martin is a former chairman of Laird plc, the Low Carbon 
Contracts Company, the Electricity Settlements Company and the 
Remuneration Consultants Group. He has served on the Boards of 
Lloyd’s, Invensys, Aegis Group, British Airways, Siemens Holdings, 
Boots, ASDA and the UK Government Efficiency and Reform Board. 
He was Chief Executive of Logica from 1993 to 2007.

Chief Executive Officer
Member of the Nomination Committee
Adrian was appointed Chief Executive Officer in August 2015, 
having been the Group Finance Director from January 2013 to 
31 July 2015. Adrian was formerly Finance Director with Psion plc, 
an international technology business, through to its acquisition 
by Motorola Solutions, Inc. in October 2012. Prior to joining Psion, 
Adrian was Chief Financial Officer of London City Airport and 
before that Financial Controller and Head of Investor Relations 
at QinetiQ Group plc.

Tim Lawlor

Chief Financial Officer
Tim joined Wincanton in September 2015 as the Chief Financial 
Officer and an Executive Director on the Board. Tim was 
previously the Director of Finance and Strategy with Serco 
Group plc, the international service company, where he also 
held a number of senior operational and group roles. He was 
a Non-executive Director and Audit Committee Chairman of 
the Institute of Directors until December 2015. Prior to Serco, 
Tim was Group Financial Controller at Sea Containers Limited. 
Tim is a Chartered Accountant.

34

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

Stewart Oades

Paul Dean

Senior Independent Director 
Member of the Audit Committee, Nomination Committee 
and Remuneration Committee
Stewart became a Non-executive Director of Wincanton in 
November 2014 and was appointed as the Senior Independent 
Director in July 2015. Stewart is currently Chair of Reflex Vehicle Hire 
Limited and Chair of John Good & Sons Limited. He was formerly a 
Non-executive Director of Palmer & Harvey plc until January 2017 
and also held the positions of President of the Freight Transport 
Association (FTA) for four years until 2013, Non-executive Director 
of MW Brands until March 2016 and Clipper Group plc until 2011. 
Prior to these appointments, Stewart was Chief Executive of 
Christian Salvesen plc and held a number of senior posts at Exel plc. 

Independent Non-executive Director 
Audit Committee Chairman and Member of the 
Nomination Committee and Remuneration Committee
Paul became a Non-executive Director of Wincanton in February 
2015 and was appointed Chairman of the Audit Committee in 
July 2015. He is currently a Non-executive Director and Audit 
Committee Chairman of Focusrite plc, Porvair plc and Polypipe 
plc, and was appointed Senior Independent Director of Porvair 
plc in April 2014 and Polypipe plc in May 2015. Paul is a Trustee and 
director of The Oxford Trust Charity. Prior to these roles he held the 
position of Group Finance Director of Ultra Electronics Holdings plc 
and Foseco plc. Paul is a Chartered Management Accountant.

David Radcliffe

Gill Barr

Independent Non-executive Director 
Member of the Audit Committee, Nomination Committee 
and Remuneration Committee
David became a Non-executive Director of Wincanton in July 
2012. He is currently a Non-executive Director at American Express 
Global Business Travel. Previously, he was Chief Executive of 
Hogg Robinson Group plc, an international corporate services 
organisation, where David has spent most of his career.

Independent Non-executive Director
Remuneration Committee Chairman and Member 
of the Audit Committee and Nomination Committee
Gill became a Non-executive Director of Wincanton in September 
2017. Gill is currently a Non-executive Director of PayPoint plc, 
N Brown Group plc and McCarthy & Stone plc. She was previously 
a Non-executive Director of Morgan Sindall plc from 2004 to 2012. 
She was Group Marketing Director of The Co-operative Group from 
2011 to 2014, and was previously Marketing Director of John Lewis. 
Gill spent seven years at Kingfisher plc where she held a variety of 
senior marketing, business development and strategy roles.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

35

Governance

CHAIRMAN’S INTRODUCTION TO CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

The Board encourages a strong culture 
of corporate governance and adheres 
to the UK Corporate Governance Code.

Dr. Martin Read CBE 
Chairman

MAINTAINING GOOD 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE 

I am pleased to introduce this report which 
describes the activities of your Board during the 
year, along with our governance arrangements 
and how we have applied the main principles, 
and complied with the relevant provisions, 
of the UK Corporate Governance Code 2016 
(the Code). 

The Board has maintained its focus on 
providing effective leadership and support 
to management to enable the delivery 
of our strategy. 

Update on Corporate Governance
I can confirm that the Company has been 
fully compliant throughout the year with 
the requirements of the Code. 

In addition, the Board and its Committees 
have completed a review of the updated 
principles and provisions of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code 2018 which will apply 
to the Company in the financial year 
commencing 1 April 2019. 

The terms of reference for each of the 
Committees have been reviewed and 
updated to reflect best practice and 
prevailing legislation.

Board Evaluation
During the year, we conducted a performance 
evaluation of the Board, its Committees 
and individual Directors using an evaluation 
questionnaire as the basis for both group and 
one-to-one discussions. The evaluation process 
is described further in the following Corporate 
Governance report. 

Changes to the Board
There have been a number of changes to 
the Board during the year. I was appointed 
as Chairman in August 2018, succeeding 
Stewart Oades, who acted as Interim 
Chairman following the untimely death 
of our previous Chairman, Steve Marshall. 
Stewart continues to serve the Company 
as the Senior Independent Director. 

Adrian Colman will step down from the 
Board as Chief Executive no later than the 
end of October and will be succeeded 
by James Wroath.

Martin Sawkins retired as a Non-executive 
Director in December 2018 after six years of 
service. Gill Barr was appointed as Martin’s 
successor as Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee. We are pleased to report 
that Debbie Lentz will join the Board as a 
Non-executive Director on 1 June 2019. 
David Radcliffe will retire as a Non-executive 
Director in December 2019 after seven years 
of service.

Stakeholder engagement
Our people remain at the heart of the 
Company’s activity. This year, the Board has 
sought to create a stronger line of engagement 
with our workforce. We have appointed 
Stewart Oades as the Non-executive Director 
who will lead a new employee engagement 
programme which will commence in the 
2019/20 financial year.

The Board welcomes engagement and 
dialogue with its shareholders and we look 
forward to seeing you at the forthcoming AGM 
to be held on 27 June 2019. Alternatively, you 
can contact us via our Company Secretary.

Dr. Martin Read CBE
Chairman 
15 May 2019

36

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT

COMPLIANCE WITH THE UK 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE CODE 

In accordance with the Listing Rules of the UK 
Listing Authority, the Company has complied 
with the principles and provisions set out in 
the Code in force at the date of this report. 

The Board is committed to maintaining 
a culture of strong governance and has 
embedded the principles of good governance 
across the business. 

All reports in the Governance section and 
Directors’ Remuneration report have been 
prepared in accordance with the Code that 
applies to this accounting period.

BOARD LEADERSHIP

Role
The Company is led and controlled by the 
Board. Details of the Directors are given on 
pages 34 to 35. The Board is responsible for 
providing effective leadership to promote 
the sustainable long term success of the 
Company. In order to discharge their duties 
effectively, the Directors are responsible for 
endorsing and applying a robust corporate 
governance structure. 

Decision-making
The Board has a formal Schedule of Matters 
Reserved for the Board, which details the 
matters to be dealt with exclusively by 
the Board. These include Group strategy 
and structure, governance and regulatory 
compliance, financial reporting, major 
capital commitments, major contracts and 
agreements, internal controls, significant 
remuneration changes, stakeholder 
engagement, and material corporate 
transactions (including acquisitions 
and disposals).

The Schedule of Matters Reserved sets out 
the parameters of each matter and limitations 
delegated to Board Committees and a 
sub-committee of the Board, the Finance 
Committee. The Finance Committee is an 
ad-hoc executive management committee, 
authorised to approve day to day operational 
matters within the limits and restrictions 
determined by the Board.

The Schedule of Matters Reserved is reviewed 
annually to ensure it remains fit for purpose 
and sets the parameters for management.

Directors’ duties
The powers and duties of the Directors are 
determined by legislation and the Company’s 
Articles of Association. Directors are required 
to act in good faith in a way that they consider 
would be most likely to promote the success of 
the Company for the benefit of shareholders as 
a whole. In doing so, the Directors are required 
to have regard (amongst other matters) to:

 • the likely consequences of any decision in 

the long term;

 • the interests of the Company’s employees;

 • the need to foster business relationships with 

suppliers, customers and others;

 • the impact of the Company’s operations on 

the community and the environment;

 • the need of the Company to maintain a 
reputation for high standards of business 
conduct; and

 • the need to act fairly towards all shareholders 

of the Company.

In addition to their statutory duties, the 
Directors must ensure that the Board as 
a whole focuses effectively on all areas of 
their responsibility. The Board considers all 
such areas within routine agenda matters 
at each Board meeting.

DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES 

The roles of the Chairman and Chief Executive 
Officer are separate and performed by different 
individuals. A responsibility statement for 
each role has been set out and adopted 
by the Board.

A full list of division of responsibilities between 
the Board, its Committees and management is 
available on the Company’s website.

The Chairman
The Chairman, Dr. Martin Read CBE, is primarily 
responsible for the operation of the Board and 
for ensuring that its strategic and supervisory 
role is achieved. He is an independent Non-
executive Chairman, deemed independent 
on appointment and remains independent 
in accordance with the Code.

The Chief Executive Officer
The Chief Executive Officer, Adrian Colman, 
is responsible for the day to day running of 
the business which includes implementation 
of the strategy, decisions made by the Board 
and operational management of the Group 
supported by his Executive Management 
Team (EMT).

Executive Management Team (EMT)
The EMT comprises the senior leadership 
team that report directly to the Chief 
Executive Officer and have management 
responsibility for the business operations and 
support functions. The EMT meet monthly 
and relevant matters are reported to Board 
meetings by the Chief Executive Officer and, 
as appropriate, the Chief Financial Officer 
and other EMT members.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

37

Governance

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT CONTINUED

Senior Independent Director
The Senior Independent Director role was 
temporarily vacated in September 2017 
when Stewart Oades was appointed to 
the position of Interim Chairman following 
the sudden death of Steve Marshall. 
Following the appointment of Dr. Martin Read 
CBE as Chairman on 1 August 2018, Stewart has 
returned to the role of Senior Independent 
Director and is an Independent Non-executive 
Director of the Board. The role of the Senior 
Independent Director is to act as a sounding 
board for the Chairman and perform an 
intermediary role to other Directors, where 
necessary. The role leads the appraisal and 
review of the Chairman’s performance and is 
available to shareholders if they have reason 
for concern that contact through the normal 
channels of the Chairman and Chief Executive 
Officer has failed to resolve.

Non-executive Directors
All of the Non-executive Directors were 
deemed independent on appointment and 
continue to be independent in accordance 
with the Code. They were each appointed 
on the basis of their calibre and experience 
and provide diversity through their skills, 
background and qualifications. Each Non-
executive Director has worked at director 
level in a variety of disciplines and commercial 
environments, similar sized organisations and 
regulated environments. The Board believes 
this enables them to collectively add value 
and provide independent oversight and 
challenge across all corporate and commercial 
aspects with their contributions and 
external perspective. 

Each Non-executive Director is appointed 
for an initial fixed term of three years, subject 
to annual re-election by shareholders. 
Their appointment term may be renewed by 
mutual agreement with due regard to the 
Code, their performance and contribution, 
and their ongoing independence.

Non-executive Directors are expected to: 
scrutinise, measure, review and challenge 
the performance of the EMT; assist in the 
development of Group strategy; review the 
Group financial information and performance; 
ensure systems of internal control and risk 
management are appropriate and effective; 
review the relationship with the External 
Auditor within the Audit Committee; and 
review the remuneration of, and succession 
planning for, the Board.

Last year, the Chairman and Non-executive 
Directors met once without the Executive 
Directors being present.

Board Committees
There are three Committees of the Board: 
an Audit Committee, a Nomination 
Committee, and a Remuneration Committee. 
Each Committee has terms of reference 
set by the Board, which are reviewed 
annually and made available on the Group’s 
website (https://www.wincanton.co.uk/
investors/governance/board-committees/). 
Membership of each Committee is determined 
by the Board on the recommendation of the 
Nomination Committee and in consultation 
with the appropriate Committee Chairman. 
The membership, role and duties discharged 
in the year ended 31 March 2019 for each 
Committee are set out in their respective 
Committee reports that follow.

Board changes
There were three changes to the Board 
this year. Dr. Martin Read CBE was appointed 
as Chairman with effect from 1 August 
2018. Martin Sawkins retired as a Non-
executive Director on 31 December 2018. 
On 6 November 2018, Gill Barr succeeded 
Martin Sawkins as Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee. We announced in the year that 
Debbie Lentz would be appointed as a Non-
executive Director with effect from 1 June 2019. 

We reported in May 2019 that Adrian Colman 
will step down from the Board as Chief 
Executive and will be succeeded by James 
Wroath who joins the Board no later than 
the end of October. Adrian will remain on 
the Board as Chief Executive until that time. 
David Radcliffe will retire as a Non-executive 
Director in December 2019.

In accordance with the Code, six of 
the Directors, being eligible, will put 
themselves forward for annual re-election 
at the Company’s AGM on 27 June 2019. 
Dr. Martin Read CBE and Debbie Lentz 
will put themselves forward for election 
as Non-executive Directors.

Meetings attendance 
The attendance of the Directors is recorded 
in the table below. It is acknowledged that 
there may be unforeseen circumstances from 
time to time which could prevent a Director 

from attending. In such circumstances the 
Director would be expected to review the 
meeting papers and provide comments 
to the Chairman, Committee Chairman or 
Company Secretary to ensure they are raised 
at the meeting. 

During the 2019 financial year the Board held 
nine scheduled Board meetings. The table 
below sets out the attendance of the Directors 
at the scheduled Board meetings during the 
year under review:

The Directors were provided with appropriate 
documentation approximately one week in 
advance of each Board or Committee meeting 
during the year. For each Board meeting, the 
papers include a trading update, and reports 
on human resources, health and safety, 
regulatory and governance matters, financial 
performance, and papers where a decision or 
approval is required.

Members of the EMT, and in some cases direct 
reports of the EMT, are invited to attend at 
least one Board meeting each year to present 
an update on the performance and future 
focus areas of their respective functions or 
business areas.

BOARD EFFECTIVENESS

Performance review
During the year, an internal performance 
evaluation was undertaken, which was 
facilitated by the Chairman and the Company 
Secretary. The evaluation comprised a 
questionnaire for completion by each Director, 
which covered all aspects of performance of 
the Board and its Committee, including

 • Board and Committee structure 

and composition;

 • The Chairman’s leadership and the 

Committee Chairs’ leadership;

 • Frequency and content of meetings;

 • Board administration;

 • Strategic oversight;

 • Succession planning; and

 • Engagement with management.

Dr. Martin Read CBE1
Paul Dean
Stewart Oades
David Radcliffe
Martin Sawkins2
Gill Barr
Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor

Board Meetings
Attended/
Scheduled
5/5
9/9
9/9
8/9
7/7
9/9
9/9
9/9

Audit Committee
Attended/
Scheduled
–
3/3
3/3
3/3
2/2
3/3
–
–

Remuneration 
Committee
Attended/
Scheduled
3/3
6/6
6/6
5/6
4/4
6/6
–
–

Nomination 
Committee
Attended/
Scheduled
3/3
3/3
3/3
2/3
1/1
3/3
3/3
–

1  Dr. Martin Read CBE was appointed as Chairman with effect from 1 August 2018.

2  Martin Sawkins resigned as a Non-executive Director with effect from 31 December 2018.

38

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

The Board discussed the results of the 
evaluation at its meeting in March 2019. 
Thereafter, the Chairman has held one-to-one 
meetings with each of the Directors. 

Board engagement
Over the course of the year, the Board received 
briefings and presentations from key members 
of the management team. 

As a discipline, the Board also holds meetings 
on operational sites. This year the Board held 
two meetings at business sites, in Derby and 
Northampton, which provided the Board with 
an opportunity to engage with employees and 
gain deeper insight into customer operations.

Outside of meetings, the Board members 
are also given opportunities to attend 
operational sites and visits are facilitated by 
the Company Secretary.

These additional activities help to ensure that 
the full Board has a sound understanding of 
the business and its operations to enable it to 
provide appropriate oversight and challenge 
to the EMT.

Other directorships
The Chairman and Non-executive Directors 
hold appointments as directors on a small 
number of other companies, as detailed in their 
biographies on pages 34 to 35. It is considered 
that the Chairman and Non-executive Directors 
allocate sufficient time and commitment to 
fulfil their duties to the Company.

The Board acknowledges that Executive 
Directors may wish to undertake external 
Non-executive Director roles outside of 
the Company. It is recognised that such 
opportunities broaden their development, 
widen their commercial experience and so 
benefit the Company. To protect the interests 
of the Company, each Executive Director is 
restricted to one Non-executive role at any 
one time. During the year and to the date of 
this report, no Executive Director held any 
external appointments. 

Conflicts of interest
The Board monitors and reviews potential 
conflicts of interest on a regular basis and 
considers any situational conflicts at each Board 
meeting. Where any conflict arises, the Board 
considers and authorises the reported actual 
or potential conflict in accordance with the 
provisions contained in the Company’s Articles 
of Association.

Directors’ indemnity and insurance
Directors are ultimately responsible for 
the operation, performance and decision-
making of the Company. In doing so, they are 
exposed to potentially significant personal 
liability under criminal or civil law and the UK 
Listing, Prospectus, Disclosure Guidance and 
Transparency Rules, which include penalties 
such as private or public censure, fines and/
or imprisonment.

In line with normal market practice, it is 
considered in the Company’s best interests to 
protect the Directors from the consequences 
of innocent errors or omissions. Accordingly, 
a Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance 
policy is maintained at the Company’s 
expense and was in place throughout the 
year. The policy provides indemnity to Group 
employees that serve as directors or officers of 
any Group company, as recommended by the 
Code, which includes the Board of Directors. 
This insurance policy would not provide cover 
in the event that a Director or officer had 
knowingly acted fraudulently or dishonestly.

Board support and advice
The Company provides the Directors with 
access to independent professional advice 
at the Company’s expense, as and when 
required. In addition, all Directors have 
unfettered access to the advice and services 
of the Company Secretary.

SHAREHOLDERS AND STAKEHOLDERS

Shareholder engagement
The Company has continued throughout 
the year to maintain effective dialogue with 
shareholders to ensure that the strategy and 
business model is understood, and any queries 
are dealt with promptly and constructively. 
Regular contact with institutional shareholders, 
fund managers and analysts is conducted 
through meetings with the Chief Executive 
Officer and Chief Financial Officer. Brokers’ 
reports and analysts’ briefing notes are 
regularly distributed to all Directors. The Board 
receives updates on feedback raised by 
institutional shareholders, fund managers 
and analysts, to enable the Directors to 
form a view of the priorities and concerns of 
stakeholders. In addition, the Chairman and 
the Remuneration Committee Chair have 
met with larger shareholders during the year.

Communications with shareholders
The Group’s website contains up to 
date information for shareholders and 
other stakeholders, such as share price, 
announcements, circulars, press releases, 
current and historic Annual Reports and 
Accounts, corporate governance information 
and shareholder documentation.

Shareholders can elect how they receive 
communications from the Company. 
Electronic communications are endorsed by 
the Board as the most efficient communication 
method and one which also helps the Group 
reduce its environmental impact and costs. 
Accordingly, all shareholders are encouraged 
to receive communications electronically 
by contacting the Company’s registrars, 
Computershare. Contact details and telephone 
numbers can be found on the Company’s 
website (https://www.wincanton.co.uk/
investors/shareholder-information).

Employees
On 31 March 2019 the Group employed 17,586 
people in the United Kingdom (UK) and 
Republic of Ireland (ROI), of which 14,449 are 
men and 3,137 are women. The average age 
of the Group’s employees is 43 years. Of all 
2,304 management level employees, 1,745 are 
men and 559 are women.

We have appointed Stewart Oades as the 
Non-executive Director who will lead a new 
employee engagement programme which will 
commence in the 2019/20 financial year.

Details of the Group’s approach to equality, 
fairness and diversity are set out in the 
Corporate Responsibility Report on pages 22 
to 25.

Stakeholder engagement
Throughout the year, the Directors and senior 
managers meet with a range of external 
stakeholders to discuss the Group’s position on 
a range of business, policy and public interest 
issues and to seek stakeholders’ views.

RISK MANAGEMENT

The Board is ultimately responsible for the 
Group’s systems of risk management and 
internal control and reviews their effectiveness 
on a regular basis throughout the year.

The Group’s systems and controls are designed 
to ensure that the Group’s exposure to 
significant risk is reduced and mitigated to 
the extent possible, with acknowledgement 
that not all risk can be eliminated. Full details 
of the Group’s risk management systems 
and processes were set out earlier, in the Risk 
Report on pages 30 to 33.

The Group’s Internal Audit function 
independently reviews and tests the 
effectiveness of the internal controls and risk 
management through an annual Internal 
Audit programme. Full details of the Group’s 
Internal Audit function and performance 
are set out in the Audit Committee report 
starting on page 41.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING

The AGM, scheduled this year for 27 June 2019, 
provides an opportunity for shareholders to 
receive the financial results for the financial year, 
engage with the Board, receive an update on 
the current performance, and ask questions 
during the meeting. Shareholders also have the 
opportunity at the AGM to meet the Auditor 
and the Company Secretary.

Dr. Martin Read CBE
Chairman
15 May 2019

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

39

Governance

NOMINATION COMMITTEE REPORT

NOMINATION COMMITTEE REPORT

Chairman’s statement
I am pleased to present the Nomination 
Committee’s report for the year ended 31 March 
2019, my first as Chairman of the Committee. 
Committee membership
The Committee comprises the Chairman, all of 
the Non-executive Directors (Gill Barr, Stewart 
Oades, David Radcliffe and Paul Dean) and 
Adrian Colman, the Chief Executive Officer. 
Attendance at the Committee’s meetings 
is set out on page 38. I should like to thank 
Stewart Oades for taking on the role of 
Interim Chairman of the Committee until my 
appointment in August 2018. Martin Sawkins 
retired from the Board and from the 
Nomination Committee on 31 December 2018.
Role of the Committee
The Nomination Committee has been 
delegated oversight from the Board of the 
leadership needs and succession planning for 
the Board and EMT, to ensure the Group has 
the best talent to perform effectively both 
now and in the future. The Committee follows 
a formal and transparent procedure for the 
appointment of new Directors to the Board.
Responsibilities of the Committee
The Nomination Committee’s remit, which 
is set out in its terms of reference, includes 
responsibility for:
 • reviewing the structure, size and composition 
of the Board and its Committees (including 
their skills, knowledge, independence, 
experience and diversity), and making 
recommendations to the Board on any 
proposed changes;

 • reviewing the succession plans for the 

Executive Directors and EMT;

 • the appointment procedure for new 

Directors and the use of external consultants;

 • making recommendations for the 

appointment of Directors;

 • preparing role specifications, including 
assessment of the time commitment 
expected and the need for availability at 
short notice for Non-executive roles;

 • reviewing the annual performance evaluation 

outcomes for areas under its remit; and

 • reviewing Directors’ external commitments 

and time available to discharge their 
responsibilities effectively.

Before a Director is appointed, the Committee 
evaluates the balance of skills, knowledge, 
experience and diversity of the Board to 
ensure that new appointments complement 
or address gaps in any of these areas. 
The Committee ensures the selection process 
is rigorous and transparent and appoints a 
professional external consultant as necessary. 
Candidates from a wide range of backgrounds 
who meet the specifications are considered 
and all appointments are made entirely on 
merit, with due regard to the benefits of 
diversity, which includes but is not limited 
to gender. Particular attention is focused on 
ensuring diversity of thought on the Board.

On joining the Board, all Directors receive an 
induction tailored to their individual needs. 
The programme includes meetings with all 
Directors, the EMT, the Company Secretary 
and heads of functions. Key site visits are 
also scheduled and undertaken to meet the 
managers in the business and deepen the 
commercial awareness of the Group.
On acceptance of their appointment, Directors 
are provided with a comprehensive suite of 
Group materials, which comprises: the Group 
strategic plan, financial information and 
trading updates, risk registers, governance and 
regulatory guidance and documents, Group 
policies, Group and business structure, statutory 
documents of the Company, and Board and 
Committee papers, minutes and other reference 
documents for the prior twelve month period.
Activities in the year ended 31 March 2019
The appointment of the Chairman was led by 
the Board in consultation with members of the 
Nomination Committee on an ad hoc basis.
During the year the Committee held 
three scheduled meetings led by the 
Chairman. The Committee undertook the 
following activities:
 • a review of financial year reporting matters 

and disclosures;

 • a review of the Company’s succession plan 
for the Board following the results of the 
internal evaluation;

 • a review of the Company’s succession plans 

for the EMT;

 • appointing an external recruitment firm, 
Lygon Group, to support the selection 
process for a Non-executive Director; and
 • a review of the time commitment and conflict 

of interest declarations of the Directors.

Upon learning of the potential future 
retirement of Adrian Colman, the Company 
appointed an external search agency, Egon 
Zehnder, to undertake a search to find a 
potential new CEO to ensure we had a 
suitable handover period between Adrian 
and any incoming CEO should the need arise. 
Role specifications were prepared to assist 
in distilling a long list of potential candidates. 
Both internal and external candidates were 
interviewed by the Chairman and Senior 
Independent Director and other Non-executive 
Directors. The shortlisted candidates were 
interviewed by all Board members. 
Egon Zehnder has not undertaken any other 
work for the Board or the Company. 
As David Radcliffe will retire from the Board on 
31 December 2019, we will appoint an external 
recruitment firm to support the selection 
process for a new Non-executive Director and a 
further announcement in relation to that will be 
made at the appropriate time.

The tenure of the Non-executive Directors 
has been reviewed during the year. 
Appointments to the Board are generally made 
for an initial three-year term and are ordinarily 
limited to three consecutive terms, subject to 
annual re-election at the AGM.

40

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Composition of the Board
The Committee reviews the composition of 
the Board and its Committees on an ongoing 
basis to ensure there is appropriate balance 
and diversity in the skills and experience of the 
membership and there are no significant gaps.
The Board considers the current membership 
balance of Executive Directors and Non-
executive Directors to ensure there is the 
right blend of commercial and governance 
experience, independence and challenge, a 
diverse range of skills and backgrounds, and 
that there is no undue individual or collective 
influence over the Board’s decision-making.
Board diversity
The Company recognises the benefits of 
a diverse Board. It remains committed to 
diversity in accordance with recommendations 
from the Davies Review (published in 2011), 
the Parker Review of November 2016 and 
the Code. The Board considers and reviews 
diversity in the fullest sense when considering 
appointments and succession planning and 
seeks to ensure an appropriate range of skills, 
experience and backgrounds are represented.
The Committee will continue to consider 
diversity when reviewing future Board 
and senior management appointments, 
Board composition and the outcome of the 
annual evaluations.
Succession planning
A key area of focus of the Committee is the 
oversight of adequate succession planning in 
respect of both the Board and of the EMT.
When considering Board succession planning, 
the Committee has considered the following 
areas at length:
 • the Committee structure and membership;
 • Non-executive Director engagement 

with management;

 • evaluation of the current skills and experience 

of the Board and gap analysis;

 • the tenure of Board members and timelines 

for planned succession; and

 • the diversity of the Board and its 

future requirements.

For EMT succession planning, the Company 
is committed to the identification and 
development of suitable candidates. 
The Committee reviews the Company’s 
succession plans, including periodic and 
phased senior management refreshment 
programmes, designed to improve bench 
strength in capability and talent.
Continuing professional development
As part of the Board evaluation process, the 
training and development needs of individual 
Directors are reviewed by the Chairman, 
supported by the Company Secretary. 
The Company makes the necessary resources 
available to support Director development.

Dr. Martin Read CBE
Nomination Committee Chairman
15 May 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

T
The Committee supports the Board in 
matters relating to financial reporting, 
m
internal control and risk management.
in

Paul Dean 
Pa
Au
Audit Committee Chairman

AUDIT COMMITTEE CHAIRMAN’S 
ANNUAL STATEMENT

I am pleased to present the Audit Committee’s 
report for the year ended 31 March 2019.

During the year the Committee has continued 
to assist the Board in fulfilling its oversight 
responsibilities by monitoring and reviewing 
the integrity of the Company’s financial 
reporting, internal and external controls, risk 
management framework and the quality 
of the internal and external audit processes. 

The Committee considers that it has acted 
in accordance with its Terms of Reference. 
The Committee has conducted a specific 
review of the Company’s assurance and risk 
management framework and considered 
the robustness of the Company’s controls, 
including internal financial controls. 

The Committee has this year reviewed the 
initial disclosures for IFRS 15, Revenue from 
Contracts with Customers, and for IFRS 16, 
Leases, and related briefings on the impact on 
the financial statements. Further information 
on IFRS 15 is provided in Note 1 to the 
Group accounts on page 75 and to IFRS 16 
in Note 1 on page 75. As part of the Group’s 
ongoing commitment to continually enhance 
the control environment, the Committee 
commissioned a review of the Group’s 
risk management landscape in the year. 
The control environment was confirmed 
as fundamentally sound.

The Committee welcomes constructive 
engagement on any of the areas under our 
remit and the Chairman can be contacted 
via the Company Secretary.

Paul Dean
Audit Committee Chairman
15 May 2019

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

Membership
As at 31 March 2019, the membership of the 
Audit Committee is comprised of the four 
independent Non-executive Directors. 

Each member of the Audit Committee is 
independent and the membership meets the 
requirements of the UK Corporate Governance 
Code. The Board is satisfied that the Chairman, 
Paul Dean, has recent and relevant financial 
experience in accordance with the Code 
and that the Committee as a whole has 
relevant experience to the sector in which 
the Group operates.

Attendance at the Committee’s meetings 
are set out on page 38 in the Corporate 
Governance report.

Meetings
The Group’s Chief Financial Officer, Group 
Financial Controller, Head of Internal Audit and 
the External Auditor attend and report to each 
Audit Committee meeting. The Chairman and 
the Chief Executive Officer also regularly attend 
Audit Committee meetings by invitation.

During the year, the Audit Committee met 
privately with the External Auditor and 
separately with the Head of Internal Audit.

Role and responsibilities
The Audit Committee assists the Board on 
the effective review of financial performance, 
internal controls, financial reporting and 
risk management.

The Audit Committee’s remit, which is 
set out in its terms of reference, includes 
responsibilities for:

 • the content and integrity of financial 

statements and any formal announcements 
relating to financial performance, including 
review of the significant financial reporting 
judgements contained therein;

 • review of the Company’s internal controls 

and risk management systems;

 • review of the effectiveness of the Internal 

Audit function;

 • recommendations to the Board in relation 
to the appointment, reappointment and 
removal of the External Auditor, their 
remuneration and terms of engagement;

 • review and monitoring of the External 

Auditor’s independence and objectivity 
and the effectiveness of the audit process;

 • review of Group policies, including setting 
the policy to control engagement of the 
External Auditor to supply non-audit services;

 • reporting to the Board on any matters 

where it considers action or improvement 
is needed, including recommendation of 
remedial actions; and

 • reporting to the Board on how the 

Committee has discharged its responsibilities.

The Audit Committee has unrestricted access 
to Company documents, management, 
Internal Audit, the Company Secretary, 
the External Auditor and any other advisers, 
as and when required.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

41

Governance

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT CONTINUED

Activities in the year ended 31 March 2019
The Audit Committee met three times during 
the year at scheduled meetings. Following the 
year end the Committee has held one further 
scheduled meeting. During those meetings 
the Committee covered the following activities:

Financial statements
 • review of the financial statements and 

narrative reporting in the Annual Report 
and Accounts for 2018 and 2019 and in the 
Half Year results to 30 September 2018, with 
particular reference to the reports being fair, 
balanced and understandable;

 • review of key judgements and accounting 
matters, including going concern, in the 
Annual Report and Accounts for 2018 
and 2019 and in the Half Year results 
to 30 September 2018;

 • review of the Stock Exchange 

announcements for the preliminary results 
for the financial years ended 31 March 2018 
and 31 March 2019 and the Half Year results 
to 30 September 2018;

 • review of updates from management on 

the progress of the implementation projects 
for the adoption of IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from 
contracts with customers’ and IFRS 16 
‘Leases’ together with proposed disclosures 
in the Annual Report and Accounts for 
2018 and 2019 and in the Half Year results 
to 30 September 2018; and

 • consideration of reports from the External 
Auditor in respect of the Annual Report 
and Accounts for 2018 and 2019 and the 
Half Year results to 30 September 2018.

Control environment and 
risk management
 • review of Group policies, such 

as Whistleblowing, Bribery, Gifts 
and Entertainment, Sharedealing, 
and Non-Audit Services policies;

 • review of the whistleblowing procedure 
whereby employees may, in confidence, 
raise concerns about possible improprieties 
in matters of financial reporting or 
other matters;

 • review of the Risk Management Committee’s 

activities, including progress on risk 
management and refreshment of Group 
and business sector risk registers;

 • review of the going concern and viability 
assessments including methodology, 
assessment outcomes and the statement 
of compliance, determination of the 
assessment period and the robustness 
of the scenarios tested;

 • review of the Group’s assessment of its 

control framework including progress in 
enhancing the control environment;

 • review of a specific contractual issue, the 
resolution plan and the lessons learned 
for the broader control environment. 
This included regular oversight of the 
investigation through to its conclusion and 
review of its outcomes and the specific 
recommendations. In addition, this was 
discussed with the Group’s auditors during 
the planning of the audit to ensure it 
included specific focus in this area;

 • review of compliance reports from 

management and Internal Audit reports on 
completed control risk self-assessments;

 • review and agreement of the Group Internal 

Audit Plan for the coming financial year;

 • review and challenge of the Group’s 2019 
Internal Audit programme, including the 
results of key audits, significant findings, and 
management’s response and resolution;

 • meetings with the Head of Internal Audit 

without management; and

 • review the effectiveness of the Internal 

Audit function.

External Audit/Auditor
 • meetings with the External Auditor without 
management to consider any potential areas 
of concern;

 • review and consideration of the External 
Auditor’s findings and recommendations 
and management’s response from the 
audit of the year ended 31 March 2018;

 • approve the terms of appointment, 
areas of responsibility and duties;

 • scope and strategy of the 2019 external 

audit set out in the engagement letter and 
recommend approval to the Board; and

 • review of the External Auditor’s performance, 

independence and objectivity.

The Committee reviewed its own terms 
of reference which are considered to be 
satisfactory. The Committee and Board were 
satisfied that the Committee and its members 
continue to operate effectively individually and 
collectively and had discharged all of the duties 
within its remit. 

Financial reporting and significant 
financial matters
The principal matters of judgement considered 
by the Committee in relation to the accounts 
for the year ended 31 March 2019 and how 
they were addressed are set out below:

Pension scheme obligations
The balance sheet for the year ended 31 March 
2019 includes a pension scheme deficit 
of £7.1m, with gross pension obligations 
of £1,153.7m. 

In arriving at the gross obligation figure, the 
Committee considered the accounting basis 
of the pension scheme in the year ended 
31 March 2019 and reviewed the pension 
data provided by management. This was 
based on the Scheme Actuary’s report on the 
key assumptions in the pension obligation 
calculation and related income statement 
items. The Committee also considered the 
work performed by the External Auditor 
to test those assumptions.

The Committee was satisfied that the 
assumptions used and the disclosures in 
the Annual Report were appropriate.

Provisions
The balance sheet for the year ended 31 March 
2019 includes provisions of £40.5m. 

The Committee reviewed management 
reports on the provisions, including the 
property provision, insurance provision 
and other provisions. The reports cover the 
provisions made in the year, provisions released 
in the year, utilisation and the rationale for 
the year end provision. The Committee also 
considered the External Auditor’s testing of 
the assumptions and methodology used in 
determining the level of provisioning.

The Committee was satisfied the assumptions 
and disclosures in the Annual Report 
were appropriate.

Control environment enhancements
At the Committee’s request, and as part 
of the Group’s ongoing commitment to 
continually enhance the control environment, 
BDO performed a review of the Group’s 
risk management landscape in the year. 
The control environment was confirmed as 
fundamentally sound and recommendations 
for improvement have been implemented. 
In particular, balance sheet controls at contract 
level have been enhanced. The Committee 
is satisfied with the progress made and will 
receive updates during the course of the year.

42

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

Any significant new engagement undertaken 
for the Company is subject to acceptance 
procedures, requiring consultation with Simon 
Haydn-Jones, the Senior Statutory Auditor.

Auditor tender 
A robust and thorough audit tender was 
undertaken in 2016 which concluded with a 
recommendation to reappoint KPMG as the 
Group’s External Auditor. The Committee 
is acutely aware that, despite undertaking 
the tender in 2016, KPMG has been the 
Group’s External Auditor since it listed in 2001. 
Therefore, although there is no requirement 
to retender for some time, the performance 
and effectiveness of the Auditor are rigorously 
considered and their length of service and 
continued appointment is kept closely 
under review.

Non-audit services
The Company’s Non-audit Services Policy is 
intended to put in place appropriate controls 
for the approval and engagement of any non-
audit assignments according to the nature and 
value of the work, to safeguard audit objectivity 
and independence.

The FRC Ethical Standard sets out the 
permissible non-audit services that external 
auditors can perform, and KPMG ensures that 
all requests from the Company to provide 
non-audit services, to any KPMG office, are 
considered in the context of the Company’s 
policy and KPMG’s own ethical standards.

Full disclosure of audit and non-audit fees paid 
in the year ended 31 March 2019 are set out in 
Note 4 to the financial statements on page 84.

Paul Dean
Audit Committee Chairman
15 May 2019

Materiality and misstatements
The External Auditor, following discussion 
with the Committee, set the materiality and 
notify the Committee if they identify any 
misstatements above a certain threshold 
through their audit. The Committee reviews 
the External Auditor’s approach on materiality 
and level of materiality applied and any 
misstatements reported.

After review of management presentations 
and reports, including consultation with the 
External Auditor, the Committee was satisfied 
that the financial statements appropriately 
addressed the critical judgements and key 
estimates in respect of the amounts reported 
and the disclosures. The Committee was 
also satisfied that the significant assumptions 
used for determining the value of assets 
and liabilities had been appropriately 
scrutinised and challenged and on that 
basis the Committee recommended the 
Annual Report to the Board for approval.

Risk management 
The Group’s principal risk management 
systems comprise:

 • risk registers and reviews at both Group, 
business unit and support functions level;

 • periodic control risk self-assessments;

 • deep dives on specific risk profiles and 

challenges in particular business areas; and

 • Risk Management Committee (RMC) 

oversight.

A full report of the Group’s risk management 
systems and controls, principal risks and 
uncertainties, and statement following the 
viability assessment are included in the Risk 
report on pages 30 to 33.

Internal Audit function
During the year the Company welcomed 
a new Head of Internal Audit. The Head of 
Internal Audit reports to the Chief Financial 
Officer and has direct access to the Chief 
Executive Officer and Chairman of the Audit 
Committee. In addition to attendance at 
all Audit Committee meetings the Head of 
Internal Audit reports regularly on internal 
audit reviews to the EMT and RMC.

The Internal Audit function provides 
independent and objective review of risks 
and controls and reports to the Board, 
Audit Committee and senior management, 
to ensure the Group complies with corporate 
governance and regulatory responsibilities. 
The audit reports produced consider the 
extent to which systems of internal control 
and risk management are designed, operate 
effectively, manage or mitigate key risks, 
and safeguard assets or limit liabilities.

The role of Internal Audit and the scope of 
its work, are regularly reviewed to ensure it 
remains independent, fit for purpose and 
addresses business changes and regulatory 
requirements. The formal Audit Charter is 
reviewed by the Committee annually.

During the year, the annual evaluation of the 
Internal Audit function was considered by the 
Audit Committee. The results of the assessment 
concluded that the Internal Audit function was 
adequately resourced and operates effectively.

External Auditor
The Committee evaluates the effectiveness 
and independence of the external audit 
process and the External Auditor, KPMG, 
annually in respect of their performance and 
conduct. Simon Haydn-Jones remains the 
Senior Statutory Auditor since 1 April 2016.

Auditor performance
The Committee undertakes an annual 
comprehensive assessment of the External 
Auditor’s performance following the financial 
year end annual audit, scoring the performance 
and effectiveness of the External Auditor, 
taking on board feedback from management. 
The Committee was satisfied that the External 
Auditor had performed effectively in respect 
of the external audits for the year ended 
31 March 2018 and the review of the Half Year 
to 30 September 2018.

Auditor independence
The Committee requires the External Auditor 
to give an annual confirmation of the 
actions it has taken to ensure objectivity and 
independence, including where non-audit 
services are provided.

For the audit of these financial statements the 
External Auditor has confirmed compliance 
with the firm’s ethics and independence 
policies, partner and staff compliance with their 
ethics and independence manual, including 
prohibition on holding Company shares. 
KPMG has assured the Group their ethics and 
independence manual is fully consistent with 
the professional practice rules of the Financial 
Reporting Council (FRC), the auditor’s regulator.

In addition, KPMG has put in place further 
independence safeguards through professional 
values, communications, internal accountability, 
risk management and independent reviews. 
KPMG regularly reviews the composition of the 
audit team and rotates teams in accordance 
with the relevant regulations; and considers 
the fees paid by the Company and its related 
entities for professional services provided.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

43

Directors’  
remuneration report

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE CHAIRMAN’S ANNUAL STATEMENT

The Remuneration Committee 
seeks to ensure a clear link between 
Executive Directors’ pay and 
enhancement of shareholder value.

Gill Barr 
Remuneration Committee Chairman

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE 
CHAIRMAN’S ANNUAL 
STATEMENT
I was delighted to be appointed as Chair of 
the Remuneration Committee in November 
2018 and I would like to thank my predecessor, 
Martin Sawkins, for his valuable work. 

Strategic context
Wincanton is well positioned in its chosen 
markets and continues to deliver strong 
service levels to its customers. We are focused 
on driving profitable and cash generative 
growth that will deliver sustainable value for 
the business. The Remuneration Committee 
seeks to ensure a clear link between Executive 
Directors’ pay, the delivery of Company strategy 
and enhancement of shareholder value. 

Key remuneration changes
As part of the recruitment of James Wroath as our 
new Chief Executive, we took the opportunity to 
make some significant changes to the operation 
of our remuneration policy. In particular:

 • Pension contribution has been set at a level 
in line with the majority of the workforce, at 
3% of salary.

 • We have rebalanced the incentive package 

from the short-term to the long-term. 
Overall incentive opportunity is the same, 
but the annual bonus opportunity is 
decreased, while the long-term incentive 
is increased. 

 • We have also increased the bonus 

deferral requirement.

At the beginning of the year the Committee 
also agreed changes to the operation of 
the annual bonus plan, and increased the 
proportion based on financial measures. 

Shareholder consultation
As a Committee, we have been conscious of 
the Annual Report on Remuneration receiving 
a vote of 80.7% support at our 2018 Annual 
General Meeting, and we have looked to 
address the issues which shareholders told us 
they were unhappy with. 

The Chairman of the Board conducted 
an extensive shareholder consultation 
in the second half of 2018 and received 
constructive feedback on investor views on the 
remuneration arrangements. On appointment, 
I went to meet a number of investors to hear 
more and understand changes that investors 
were looking for. I would like to thank investors 
for their time and input into our process. 

One key area of feedback was the relationship 
between pay outcomes and performance. 
Reflecting feedback we have made changes 
to the approach to remuneration for the 
year ended 31 March 2019 and year ended 
31 March 2020. 

Changes to the operation of the policy
The Committee determined that for the year 
ended 31 March 2019 performance year, we 
would increase the weighting on financial 
performance under the Annual Bonus Plan 
from 60% to 75%. The remaining 25% is 
awarded on the basis of strategic objectives 
(rather than personal objectives) clearly aligned 
to the business strategy.

During the year, we conducted a thorough 
governance health check and, as a result, made 
a number of changes. In particular, we have 
introduced a two-year post vesting holding period 
to all LTIP awards granted to Executive Directors from 
1 April 2019 onwards. We have also made changes 
in the areas of discretion, review of wider workforce 
remuneration and the expansion of malus and 
clawback. More details can be found on page 48. 

Remuneration arrangements 
for incoming CEO
The Committee determined the following 
arrangements for the incoming CEO. 
James Wroath’s salary on appointment has 
been set at a lower level than the current 
incumbent at £425,000. Recognising the new 
governance code and evolving shareholder 
views, the pension level has also been set 
at a lower level of 3% of salary, which is 
aligned with the contribution provided to the 
majority of the wider workforce. The incentive 
opportunities have been rebalanced to create 

more long-term alignment, with the Annual 
Bonus Plan opportunity decreased from 
150% of salary to 100% of salary, and the LTIP 
opportunity increased from 100% of salary to 
150% of salary. We made no buyout of LTIP 
awards forfeited, but given this was a global 
search and James Wroath is relocating from 
the United States, the Committee agreed to 
provide for an amount of relocation expenses. 
More details can be found on page 52. 

Remuneration arrangements 
for outgoing CEO
As announced on 9 May, Adrian Colman 
notified the Board of his intention to retire. It is 
anticipated that Adrian will work the majority of 
his six month notice period to effect a smooth 
handover to James. The Committee determined 
the following in relation to his remuneration:

 • He will receive no salary increase for the year 

ended 31 March 2020.

 • He will not be made a 2019 LTIP grant.
 • His incentive awards will be pro-rated 

for time and be subject to performance-
testing at the normal date. They will also be 
subject to mitigation following his cessation 
of employment. 

Executive Director service contracts
During the year we performed a review of 
our remuneration arrangements against the 
latest corporate governance developments. 
This included reviewing our Executive Directors’ 
service contracts. As a result of this review, 
a legacy discrepancy between the service 
contracts and the remuneration policy was 
found. Details are set out on page 54. While we 
were disappointed to discover this discrepancy, 
the additional contractual provisions for 
Executive Directors would not result in payments 
exceeding 12 months’ salary and benefits. 

For future executive directors, including 
our incoming CEO, these provisions have 
been removed. 

A new look report
We have refreshed and simplified our 
approach to remuneration disclosure.

44

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

‘At a glance’ and new disclosure
We have introduced a new section to provide 
an overview of pay outcomes for the year ended 
31 March 2019 and the intended operation of 
the policy for the year ended 31 March 2020. 
We have also sought to enhance our disclosure 
on strategic objectives and achievements under 
the Annual Bonus Plan. 

We have strengthened the disclosure of 
workforce pay and conditions, including 
voluntary disclosure of our CEO pay ratio. 

Outturns for the year
Annual Bonus awards for the year were based 
75% on underlying profit before tax and 25% 
on the achievement of strategic objectives. 
The Group delivered good underlying profit 
before tax performance of £49.3m, achieving 
65% of maximum against the targets set, and 
both Executive Directors performed well 
against their strategic objectives. In particular 
Wincanton delivered a record health & 
safety performance with LTIFR of 0.51, a 67% 
reduction over the last six years. Adrian Colman 
and Tim Lawlor received bonuses of 65% and 
66% of maximum, respectively.

LTIP awards vesting in the year were based 60% 
on EPS growth and 40% on TSR performance 
relative to the FTSE All-Share Index (excluding 
investment trusts). Following strong EPS 
growth of 12% p.a. and TSR outperformance 
of the Index by 4.5% p.a., 83.6% of maximum 
will vest.

Salary review
Adrian Colman did not receive a salary increase. 
Tim Lawlor’s salary was increased by 1.5% for 
year ended 31 March 2020. This increase was in 
line with the average increase applied across 
the organisation. 

Policy review
In the forthcoming year, we will be reviewing 
our policy. We will conduct a full review to 
ensure it is aligned with our strategy, good 
practice, investor expectations and corporate 
governance changes. Continuing dialogue 
with shareholders will be an important part of 
this process. As part of the review we will be 
considering alignment with strategy, balance of 
incentives between short term and long term, 
performance measures, time horizons, pension 
levels and consideration of post cessation 
shareholding requirements. 

Our AGM
The Annual Report on Remuneration will be 
presented to shareholders for an advisory 
vote at the forthcoming AGM. I hope that our 
shareholders will support the changes we 
have made. On behalf of the Committee, we 
welcome feedback and if you would like to 
input, please contact the Company Secretary. 

Gill Barr
Remuneration Committee Chairman
15 May 2019

Key Committee activities in the year
Pay and reporting
 • Consider pay recommendations for 
Executive Directors and Executive 
Management Team

 • Approve incentive outcomes for 

Executive Directors and Executive 
Management Team

 • Consider incentive grants to 

Executive Directors and other senior 
management, including performance 
measures and targets 

 • Monitor performance for unvested 

LTIP awards 

 • Approve exercises of vested share 

awards and leaver treatment

 • Review Chairman’s fee

Governance, reporting, stakeholders
 • Review Executive Director remuneration 

arrangements against governance 
changes and good practice

 • Consider Group HR strategy 
and compliance with the 
Remuneration Policy

 • Revise approach to 

remuneration reporting 

 • Review of Committee’s terms 

of reference

 • Shareholder engagement

Committee responsibilities 
and composition 
The Committee is responsible for ensuring 
that the remuneration of Directors and 
senior management supports the delivery 
of the strategic goals of the Group 
without encouraging undesirable risk 
taking behaviour. This is achieved through 
the Committee approving all aspects 
of Executive Director and Executive 
Management Team remuneration, and 
monitoring pay arrangements for the 
wider workforce.

The Terms of Reference set out the 
full responsibilities of the Committee, 
and are available on the Group’s website 
at www.wincanton.co.uk/.

The Committee is chaired by Gill Barr. 
The Committee also comprises Dr. 
Martin Read CBE, Stewart Oades, Paul Dean 
and David Radcliffe. Dr. Martin Read CBE 
joined the Committee on appointment to 
the Board in August 2018. Martin Sawkins 
stepped down as Chairman of the 
Committee in November 2018. 

There were six scheduled Committee 
meetings during the year. 

All members of the Committee are 
independent Non-executive Directors, 
and were selected to represent a broad 
range of backgrounds and experience 
to provide balance and diversity. 
The Chief Executive Officer, Chief 
Financial Officer and Group HR Director 
may attend the Committee’s meetings 
by invitation to provide advice and 
assistance on specific matters, and the 
Company Secretary acts as Secretary 
to the Committee. However, no attendee 
is present when their own remuneration 
is being discussed.

Further details of Committee membership 
and attendance at meetings are included 
in the Corporate Governance report 
on page 38.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

45

Directors’  
remuneration report

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION

‘AT A GLANCE’ – YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019 OUTTURNS

Element

Salary

Year ended 31 March 2019 outturn

 • Salaries effective 1 July 2018:

CEO
CFO

£446,600
£311,100

Pension and  
benefits

Annual  
Bonus

LTIP

Single total figure 
of remuneration

 • Pension contribution of 22% of salary for Adrian Colman and 15% of salary for Tim Lawlor

 • Benefits provided in line with approved policy

 • For the year ended 31 March 2019, we increased the proportion based on financial measures from 60% to 75% in order 

to strengthen the link to our financial performance

Profit before tax (75%): 

Strategic objectives and achievements (25%): 

Threshold
Target
Maximum
Actual

 • CEO outturn: 65% of maximum

 • CFO outturn: 66% of maximum

Minimum 
vesting

TSR in line 
with Index

6% p.a.  
growth

TSR

EPS

Wincanton Outturn

Total vesting: 83.6% of maximum

£’000
Salary
Pension & benefits
Annual bonus
LTIP
Total

Underlying PBT 
£m

£46.4m Strategic objectives
£48.6m
£51.0m
£49.3m

Achievement
CEO: 17% / 25%
CFO: 18% / 25%

Index +4.5%

Maximum 
vesting

Index  
+10% p.a.

11% p.a. 
growth

12% p.a. 
growth

Adrian Colman

Tim Lawlor

Year ended 
31 March 2019
445
124
438
491
1,498

Year ended 
31 March 2018
439
123
369
1,002
1,933

Year ended 
31 March 2019
310
63
248
337
958

Year ended 
31 March 2018
304
63
219
297
883

46

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

‘AT A GLANCE’ – IMPLEMENTATION FOR THE YEAR ENDING 31 MARCH 2020

Element

Salary

Overview of remuneration policy

Summary of implementation for the year ended 31 March 2020

 • Salary increases will ordinarily 
be (in percentage of salary 
terms) in line with those 
of the wider workforce

 • Salaries effective 1 July 2019:

Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor

Salary from 
1 July 2018
£446,600
£311,100

Increase
0%
1.5%

Salary from 
1 July 2019
£446,600
£315,767

Pension and  
benefits

Annual  
Bonus

 • The salary increase for Tim Lawlor is in line with the average increase awarded 

to the wider workforce of 1.5%

 • The salary for James Wroath on appointment will be £425,000

 • Pension contribution of 22% of salary for Adrian Colman and 15% of salary 

for Tim Lawlor

 • The pension contribution for James Wroath will be 3% of salary, which is aligned 

with the contributions provided to the majority of the wider workforce

 • Maximum contribution of 15% 
of salary for new hires and 
Executive Directors appointed 
from 1 July 2017 (legacy 
maximum of 22% of salary)

 • Benefits include company car 
or car allowance and private 
medical insurance

 • Maximum opportunity: 

 • Maximum opportunities:

150% of salary

 • Ability to operate discretion 
to override formulaic bonus 
outcome where not truly 
reflective of performance

 – CEO: 150% of salary

 – CFO: 120% of salary

 – New CEO: 100% of salary

 • Refreshed approach to strategic objectives to demonstrate clearer linkage 

 • Any bonus earned above 100% 

to strategic performance

of salary must be used to purchase 
Wincanton shares until the share 
ownership guideline is achieved

 • Malus and clawback  

provisions apply

Performance measure
Underlying PBT
Strategic objectives 

Weighting
75%
25%

 • The Committee has reviewed the strategic objectives to ensure that these are 
closely aligned with the ongoing business strategy and include hard numerical 
targets where appropriate

LTIP

 • Performance measured over 

 • Maximum opportunities:

at least three years

 • Maximum award levels of 100% 

of salary (250% of salary in 
exceptional circumstances)

 • Up to 25% of maximum vests 
for threshold performance

 • Malus and clawback  

provisions apply

 – CEO: 100% of salary

 – CFO: 100% of salary

 – New CEO: 150% of salary (for details, see page 52)

 • Performance will be measured over three years: 

Basic underlying 
EPS growth
Relative TSR vs. FTSE 
All-Share excluding 
investment trusts

Weighting
60%

Threshold  
(25% of max)
6% p.a.

Maximum
11% p.a.

40% TSR growth p.a. 
equal to Index 
growth p.a.

TSR growth p.a. 
of 10% or more 
outperformance of 
Index growth p.a.

 • For awards granted from 1 April 2019 onwards, LTIP awards will be subject 

to a two-year post-vesting holding period

Shareholding 
guidelines

 • 150% of salary, for executives 
in place from 1 April 2015

 • For executives in place before 
1 April 2015, shareholding 
guideline of 300% of salary

 • CEO: 300% of salary

 • CFO: 150% of salary

 • New CEO: 200% of salary

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

47

Directors’  
remuneration report

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

RESPONSE TO THE UPDATED 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE CODE

Following the changes to the Corporate 
Governance Code, the Committee undertook 
a review of its remuneration arrangements for 
compliance with the updated features. 

The table below sets out our response 
to the Code:

Already compliant / change made, 
within the scope of our existing 
remuneration policy, for the year 
ending 31 March 2020 onwards

Appropriate approach to be considered 
in the forthcoming year as part of our 
remuneration policy review

Feature

Compliance

Remarks

 • The Committee’s terms of reference already extend the Committee’s remit to 

our Executive Management Team.

 • In the annual Remuneration Committee calendar, we have introduced a 

separate session where the Committee are provided with a fuller briefing of 
all-employee remuneration and conditions, including consideration of gender 
pay, pay ratios, workforce engagement, etc.

 • The Committee are mindful of shareholders’ strong views in this area. 
Our pension policy for new hires was reduced to 15% in July 2017.

 • The newly appointed CEO’s pension provision will be 3% of salary, aligned to 

that provided to the wider workforce.

 • The Committee will review the overall executive director pension policy as part 

of the wider policy review in the forthcoming year.

 • The Committee has introduced a two-year post-vesting holding period for all 

LTIP awards granted after 1 April 2019.

 • We are committed to ensuring Executive Directors build up a meaningful 

shareholding in the Company to ensure long-term alignment with 
our shareholders.

 • Our shareholding guidelines, and the introduction of a post-employment 
shareholding requirement, will be considered as part of our remuneration 
policy review.

 • Our existing remuneration policy allows for the application of discretion in 

exceptional circumstances under both the Annual Bonus and LTIP.

 • The Committee has reviewed its framework for the operation of discretion to 
ensure a wide range of appropriate factors are taken into consideration when 
determining whether or not discretion should be applied. This framework will 
apply for the year ended 31 March 2020 Annual Bonus and LTIP awards made 
from 1 April 2019.

 • The malus and clawback terms of our Annual Bonus and LTIP have been 

reviewed, and we will be expanding the circumstances in which they may 
apply in line with the FRC Guidance on Board Effectiveness.

Committee remit and responsibilities: 
 • Responsibility for the Chairman, Executive 

Directors and senior management

 • Review workforce remuneration and 

related policies

Pension levels:
 • Executive Director contribution levels 
should be aligned with those available 
to the wider workforce

Holding period:
 • Share awards should be subject to a total 
vesting and holding period of five years 
or more

Post-employment shareholding 
requirement:
 • A formal policy for post-employment 
shareholding requirements should 
be developed, encompassing both 
unvested and vested shares

Discretion:
 • Remuneration schemes should enable 

the use of discretion to override 
formulaic outcomes

Recovery provisions:
 • Remuneration schemes should include 

provisions that would enable the 
Company to recover and/or withhold 
sums or share awards

48

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

CONSIDERATION OF WIDER 
WORKFORCE PAY AND CONDITIONS

Wincanton is a people-powered business, 
with dedicated teams at the heart of the 
service we aim to deliver to our customers. 
We are therefore committed to ensuring the 
pay and conditions of our workforce allow our 
colleagues to achieve their full potential and 
provide a great customer experience. 

Remuneration below the board
 • Salary levels are set in line with market 
requirements. The workforce salary 
environment is taken into consideration 
when reviewing salary increases for EDs 
and the EMT.

 • All employees are eligible to participate in 

the Wincanton plc Pension Scheme.

 • 5,000 employees are participating in a new 
Wincanton benefits and communication 
platform, which allows colleagues online 
access to company benefits and need to 
know information. 

 • Strong individual, business line and Company 
performance is incentivised and recognised 
through our annual bonus schemes and, for 
our most senior employees, the LTIP.

 • Recognition of great performance and 
outstanding achievements through our 
‘Colleague of the Month’ and ‘Driver of 
the Year’ awards. The Driver of the Year 
competition is a highly celebrated annual 
event that recognises the very best skill, 
talent, professionalism and knowledge 
from drivers across the business. Last year, 
over six months, 200 drivers battled it out 
undertaking practical skills tasks showcasing 
ability, anticipation, and awareness to be 
crowned LGV Driver of the Year; MHE Driver 
of the Year and Newcomer of the Year, each 
winning a share of the prize fund.

 • Employee ownership in the Company and 
alignment with the delivery of the Group 
strategy is encouraged through participation 
in the SIP. 

Pay ratio

Year
2019

25th percentile pay ratio
72:1

Median pay ratio
59:1

75th percentile pay ratio
45:1

Our early disclosure of the CEO pay ratio shown above is based on the current CEO single 
figure compared with the all-employee data used to generate our latest published Gender 
Pay Report, where pay data was taken as at April 2018. 

Gender pay

Hourly rate of pay
Bonus pay

Mean
2019: 8% (2018: 4%)
2019: 47% (2018: 39%)

Median
2019: 10% (2018: 7%)
2019: 3% (2018: (4)%)

The mean and median gender pay gaps for the year are 8% and 10% respectively. The mean 
is slightly below the national figure published by the Office for National Statistics of 8.6%.

The mean and median gap for bonus pay are 47% and 3% respectively. The Group’s mean 
bonus pay gap is driven by the higher bonus opportunities for more senior positions, which 
are currently filled by more men than women. Our median bonus pay gap is more reflective 
of our approach to bonus awards across the organisation. More details can be found in the 
Wincanton Gender Pay Report published on the Group’s website at www.wincanton.co.uk.

Designated Non-executive Director to the workforce
During the year, Stewart Oades was appointed designated Non-executive Director 
to the workforce. 

The key activities in the forthcoming year are currently being developed as Stewart consults 
employees across the organisation.

Workforce engagement
We have a number of initiatives in place to 
allow us to listen to the views of our staff and 
act upon them to ensure Wincanton is a great 
place to work, including:

 • Operation of our biannual ‘Your Pulse’ 

employee engagement survey. The findings 
are reviewed at all levels of the Group and 
help to shape the ongoing strategy across 
the business.

 • Listening group meetings with all major 
employee stakeholders and steering 
groups for other key colleagues including 
general managers and drivers, in addition 
to our regular departmental and Group-
wide meetings.

 • The EMT host regular business briefings to 
update managers on the Group’s business 
performance and new innovations, as well 
as providing opportunities for managers to 
raise questions through our Q&A sessions.

Not all about pay
At Wincanton, we place great importance on 
providing development opportunities for our 
employees to build their careers and enhance 
their skills through a portfolio of apprenticeship 
and development programmes. We support 
and invest in individuals to achieve their 
potential across the business, as well as 
developing our Talent pipelines, such as 
Graduates, to fulfil future skills requirements.

We are committed to making Wincanton 
a great place to work. We encourage and 
embrace employee diversity, equality and 
inclusion, and encourage our people to live our 
values. We work hard to ensure that employees 
of all backgrounds, genders and ethnicities are 
valued equally and that we treat each other 
with respect. We expect every employee to 
take part in our diversity programmes, which 
endorse these expectations.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

49

Directors’  
remuneration report

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE OF REMUNERATION – EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

The following audited table sets out the single total figure of remuneration for Executive Directors for the years ended 31 March 2019 and 
31 March 2018.

Salary
Taxable benefits
Pension-related benefits
Annual Bonus
LTIP1
Total

Adrian Colman

Tim Lawlor

31 March 2019  
£’000
445
26
98
438
491
1,498

31 March 2018  
£’000
439
26
97
369
1,002
1,933

31 March 2019  
£’000
310
17
46
248
337
958

31 March 2018  
£’000
304
17
46
219
297
883

1  The value of LTIP for the year ended 31 March 2019 includes awards vesting for performance during the financial year under the 2016 LTIP. The 2016 LTIP is valued based on the three-month 

average share price to year-end of £2.38, as the share price on date of vesting (21 July 2019) is not yet known. Further details can be found on page 51. For the year ended 31 March 2018, the LTIP 
figure has been updated for the actual share price on the date of vesting of the 2015 LTIP.

Salaries
During the year, the Committee approved a salary increase of 1.5% for the Chief Financial Officer, effective from 1 July 2019. This aligns with the 
increase awarded to the wider workforce of 1.5%. No increase was awarded to the Chief Executive.

Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor

Salary as at  
31 March 2018
£440,000
£305,000

Increase
1.5%
2.0%

Salary from  
1 July 2018
£446,600
£311,100

Increase
0%
1.5%

Salary from  
1 July 2019
£446,600
£315,767

Taxable benefits and pension-related benefits
Benefits include company car allowance and healthcare. The value of company car allowance provided during the year was £25,000 
for Adrian Colman and £15,600 for Tim Lawlor. 

The Company contributes to the pension scheme on behalf of Executive Directors, and provides a salary supplement in lieu of such contributions 
where the value exceeds the HMRC annual allowance. During the year, the Company paid a contribution equivalent to 22% of Adrian Colman’s 
pensionable salary and 15% of Tim Lawlor’s pensionable salary. 

James Wroath’s pension contribution will be 3% of salary.

Incentive outturns
Year ended 31 March 2019 Annual Bonus
Under the Annual Bonus, the maximum opportunities for the year were 150% of salary and 120% of salary for Adrian Colman and Tim Lawlor, 
respectively. The performance measures were underlying profit before tax (PBT) and delivery of strategic objectives and achievements 
as shown below.

The Committee determined that for the year ended 31 March 2019, the weighting on financial performance under the Annual Bonus would 
be increased from 60% to 75%.

Underlying PBT performance (75% of Annual Bonus):

Underlying PBT target
Proportion of maximum payable

Strategic objectives and achievements for CEO (25% of Annual Bonus):

Threshold
£46.4m
25%

Target
£48.6m
50%

Maximum
£51.0m
100%

Actual
£49.3m
65%

Objective (Each weighted 5%)
People and organisation 

Sales

Strategy / plan

Transport management 
system
Health and safety

Total (maximum 25%)

Achievement
Successfully recruited and inducted Chairman of the Board and R&C Managing Director, and recruited 
Group HR Director.
Reviewed and updated Executive Management Team succession plans.
Annualised sales wins during the year exceeded the target set by the Committee at the start of the year, 
although these were delivered later in the year than expected. 
Contribution to strategy refresh process including assessment of financial and balance sheet capability, 
capacity and risk appetite to support consideration of strategic options.
Achievement of milestones in relation to implementation of the TMS within the business to time and budget.

Delivery of record Health & Safety performance, with LTIFR of 0.51, representing a 67% reduction over the last 
six years and significant outperformance of the target of 0.60 set at the start of the year.
Top colleague engagement score for Health & Safety performance in the Your Pulse surveys.
17% / 25%

50

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

Strategic objectives and achievements for CFO (25% of Annual Bonus):

Objective
People and organisation

Sales

Strategy / plan

Pension 

Debt

Total (maximum 25%)

Achievement
Significant increase in employee engagement score for Finance team, ahead of target.
Successfully recruited and inducted Group Financial Controller, Procurement Director and Head of Internal Audit.
Reviewed and updated succession plans for Finance and other functional roles.
Good annualised sales wins during the year, exceeding the target set by the Committee at the start of the year, 
although these were delivered later in the year than expected.
Strong performance against renewals of contracts.
Contribution to strategy refresh process including assessment of financial and balance sheet capability, 
capacity and risk appetite to support consideration of strategic options.
Successfully concluded triennial negotiations with pension trustees with outcome that meets the Company 
objective of being affordable and not constraining future growth, investment or decision-making.
Obtained tPR support for the outcome, and provided transparent communications to financial stakeholders. 
Delivered average net debt below target set at the start of the year, and concluded successful negotiations 
with providers.
18% / 25%

Following consideration of the above, the Committee awarded annual bonuses as follows:

Underlying PBT outturn (% of maximum)
Strategic objectives outturn (% of maximum)
Overall outturn (% of maximum)

Weighting
75%
25%

Adrian Colman
64.6%
68.0%
65.4%

Tim Lawlor
64.6%
72.0%
66.4%

The Committee considered the appropriateness of the formulaic outcome above in the context of overall Group and individual performance during 
the year, and were satisfied the outcome above was reflective of overall performance.

2016 LTIP
In July 2016, Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) awards of 100% of salary were granted to Adrian Colman and Tim Lawlor, based on underlying EPS 
growth performance and relative TSR performance vs. the FTSE All-Share Index (excluding investment trusts).

The performance targets and actual performance are shown in the table below:

Measure
Underlying EPS growth (60%)
Relative TSR (40%)

Total LTIP vesting

Threshold (25% of  
maximum vesting)
6% p.a. growth
TSR equal to Index

Target range 
(Straight-line vesting between threshold and maximum)

Maximum
11% p.a. growth
TSR equal to 
Index +10% p.a.

Actual performance achieved
12% p.a. growth
TSR equal to 
Index +4.5% p.a. 

Vesting  
(% of maximum)
100%
58.9%

83.6%

Of the LTIP amounts shown in the single total figure of remuneration table for year ended 31 March 2019 in relation to this award, 24% was due 
to share price growth. 

LTIP AWARDS MADE IN THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019 (AUDITED)

LTIP awards of 100% of salary were made to the Executive Directors during the year, as set out below:

Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor

Date of award
24 July 2018
24 July 2018

Vesting date
24 July 2021
24 July 2021

1  Average share price over the three business days preceding the date of grant.

Share price1
£2.74
£2.74

No. of nil-cost options 
granted under the LTIP
162,409
113,504

Face value  
of award (£)
445,000
311,000

The awards are subject to underlying EPS growth performance and relative TSR performance vs. the FTSE All-Share Index (excluding investment 
trusts), with performance weightings and targets in line with those applicable to the 2016 LTIP. 

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

51

Directors’  
remuneration report

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

JAMES WROATH’S APPOINTMENT

James Wroath’s remuneration arrangements on appointment will be as follows:

 • His salary will be £425,000.

 • The pension contribution level will be 3% of salary, aligned with the contribution provided to the majority of the wider workforce. 

 • The incentive opportunities for the CEO have been rebalanced to create a greater focus on long-term alignment:

 –  The annual bonus opportunity has been decreased from 150% of salary to 100% of salary.

 –  The LTIP opportunity has been increased from 100% of salary to 150% of salary. 

The Committee has made use of the exceptional headroom in the remuneration policy to effect this rebalancing for the first year of appointment, 
with the intention of ratifying the approach when the policy is renewed at the 2020 AGM. 

 • An additional deferral requirement has been included of 20% of any bonus earned to be deferred into Company shares. 

 • Incentives for year ending 31 March 2020 will be pro-rated for the proportion of the year in employment, with financial performance measures and 

targets aligned with other Executive Directors.

 • A buyout award will be made in relation to the annual bonus forfeited by James Wroath due to his resignation from Lufthansa. The buyout 

has been pro-rated for time and will be subject to performance (with a condition aligned to actual payout from the Lufthansa bonus scheme). 
The time horizon will be aligned with, or longer than, the time horizon of the award forfeited. 

 • No buyout has been made of the LTIP awards he forfeited on joining.

 • The policy requirement for shareholding guidelines was reduced from 300% to 150% of salary for appointees from 1 April 2015. 

James Wroath’s shareholding guideline will be set at 200% of salary.

 • Given this was a global search, and James Wroath is relocating from the United States, the Committee agreed to provide for an amount of relocation 
expenses. Approved relocation expenses include removal costs, a portion of realtor expenses on sale of property, stamp duty and transaction costs 
on purchase of new property, economy flights for family and other expenses considered reasonable. The total net amount provided will be capped 
at an amount of £120,000.

 • Mr Wroath’s service agreement provides for 12 months’ notice from either the Company or the Director. 

SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE OF REMUNERATION – NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS (AUDITED)

The following table sets out the single total figure of remuneration for Non-executive Directors for the years ended 31 March 2019 and 31 March 2018.

£’000
Paul Dean
Stewart Oades1
David Radcliffe
Martin Sawkins2
Dr. Martin Read CBE3
Gill Barr4

Fees

2019
53
92
45
38
127
48

2018
53
108
45
53
–
24

1  Stewart Oades took up the role of Interim Chairman between 1 October 2017 and 31 July 2018, during which period his fees reflected those of the prior Chairman. From 1 August 2018, 

he resumed his prior role as Senior Independent Director, from which point he was paid the Non-executive Director base fee plus an additional Senior Independent Director fee. 

2  Martin Sawkins left the Group on 31 December 2018. 

3  Dr. Martin Read CBE was appointed as Chairman on 1 August 2018. 

4  Gill Barr was appointed as Non-executive Director on 15 September 2017 and subsequently appointed as Chair of the Remuneration Committee on 6 November 2018. 

Fees
The following fees are payable to the Chairman and Non-executive Directors. Dr. Martin Read’s annual fee on appointment was £190,000. 
During the year, the Board introduced an additional fee for the Senior Independent Director.

Role
Chairman fee
Non-executive Director base fee
Additional Senior Independent Director fee
Additional Remuneration / Audit Committee Chairman fee

Fee
£190,000
£45,000
£8,000
£8,000

52

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

PAYMENTS TO PAST DIRECTORS (AUDITED)

There have been no payments made to past Directors during the year.

PAYMENTS FOR LOSS OF OFFICE (AUDITED)

There have been no payments for loss of office during the year.

SHARE OWNERSHIP AND SHARE INTERESTS (AUDITED)

Executive Directors are subject to shareholding guidelines. In line with the policy, Executive Directors are required to purchase shares with any bonus 
above 100% of salary until their guideline is achieved.

Adrian Colman has a shareholding guideline of 300% of salary, which he met during the year ended 31 March 2016 and continues to maintain at the 
date of this report. Tim Lawlor has a shareholding guideline of 150% of salary, which he is expected to build up over time through the retention of 
shares vesting under the Company’s share schemes.

Total share interests as at 31 March 2019

Shares

Nil cost options

Options

Owned / vested
31 March 2018
946,942
–
–
10,000
19,367
25,000
9,790
–

Owned / vested
31 March 2019
1,181,630
70,885
36,509
10,000
19,367
25,000
9,790
4,000

Unvested and 
subject to 
continued 
employment
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Vested but 
unexercised
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Unvested and 
subject to 
performance
584,290
404,510
–
–
–
–
–
–

Vested but 
unexercised
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Unvested and 
subject to 
performance
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Director
Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor
Dr. Martin Read CBE
Paul Dean
Stewart Oades
David Radcliffe
Martin Sawkins
Gill Barr

There were no changes in the Directors’ personal holdings between 1 April 2019 and the date of this report.

Share plan interests

Date of award

Vest date

Option 
exercise price1

Share price at
date of award2

No. of shares 
under award as 
at 1 April 2018

Shares 
awarded 
during the 
year

No. of shares 
vested during 
the year

No. of shares 
lapsed  
during the  
year

No. of shares 
exercised 
during the 
year

No. of shares 
under award at 
31 March 2019

Adrian Colman
SOP
LTIP
LTIP
LTIP
LTIP

11 Jul 2014
16 Jul 2015
21 Jul 2016
18 Jul 2017
24 Jul 2018

11 Jul 2017
16 Jul 2018
21 Jul 2019
18 Jul 2020
24 Jul 2021

Tim Lawlor
LTIP
LTIP
LTIP
LTIP

28 Sep 2015 16 Jul 2018
21 Jul 2019
21 Jul 2016
18 Jul 2020
18 Jul 2017
24 Jul 2021
24 Jul 2018

£1.37
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil

Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil

1  Three-day average share price immediately preceding the date of award. 

2  Mid-market quotation share price on the date of award. 

£1.40
£1.88
£1.77
£2.51
£2.74

£2.07
£1.77
£2.51
£2.74

446,715
228,845
246,582
175,299
–
1,097,441

142,512
169,492
121,514
–
433,518

–
–
–
–
162,409
162,409

–
–
–
113,504
113,504

–
214,772
–
–
–
214,772

133,747
–
–
–
133,747

–
14,073
–
–
–
14,073

8,765
–
–
–
8,765

446,715
214,772
–
–
–
661,487

133,747
–
–
–
133,747

–
–
246,582
175,299
162,409
584,290

–
169,492
121,514
113,504
404,510

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

53

Directors’  
remuneration report

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

DILUTION LIMITS

All share-based awards are made under plans that incorporate dilution limits consistent with the guidelines provided by the Investment Association. 
These limits are 10% in any rolling 10-year period for all share plans and 5% in any rolling 10-year period for executive share plans and are in relation 
to new issue shares. Estimated dilution from existing awards made over the last 10 years up to 31 March 2019 is as follows:

All employee share plans
Executive share plans

SERVICE AGREEMENTS

Actual
2.5%
2.5%

Limit
10%
5%

All Executive Directors are appointed on the basis of a 12-month rolling period, subject to election and annual re-election by the Company’s 
shareholders at the AGM. Details of employment contracts for the Executive Directors are summarised in the table below:

Director
Adrian Colman
Tim Lawlor

Date of appointment  
to the Board
7 Jan 2013
28 Sep 2015

Date of current contract
5 Jul 2015
6 Jul 2015

Notice period (Company)
12 months
12 months

Notice period (Director)
6 months
6 months

Unexpired term as at  
31 March 2019
Rolling 12 months
Rolling 12 months

The Chairman and Non-executive Directors’ are appointed under letters of appointment. All Directors are subject to re-election every three years, 
however all Directors currently put themselves forward for annual re-election at each AGM. Details of appointment dates and terms for the Chairman 
and Non-executive Directors are summarised in the table below.

Director
Dr. Martin Read CBE
Gill Barr
Paul Dean
Stewart Oades
David Radcliffe

Date of appointment  
to the Board
1 Aug 2018
15 Sep 2017
1 Feb 2015
1 Nov 2014
27 Jul 2012

Date of original letter 
of appointment
15 Jul 2018
12 Sep 2017
21 Jan 2015
30 Oct 2014
22 Jun 2012

Date of current letter 
of appointment
15 Jul 2018
31 Jul 2018
31 Jul 2018
31 Jul 2018
31 Jul 2018

Unexpired term as at  
31 March 2019
27 months
27 months
27 months
27 months
27 months

The Executive Directors’ service contracts and Chairman and Non-executive Directors’ letters of appointment are available for inspection 
by shareholders at the Company’s registered office and will be available at the 2019 AGM.

During the year, the Company performed a review of the remuneration arrangements against the latest corporate governance developments, 
which included reviewing the Executive Directors’ service contracts. During this review, a legacy discrepancy between the service contracts and 
the Directors’ Remuneration Policy was found. The contractual provisions provide for the following in the event of a change of control:

 • If a Director or the Company provides notice to terminate employment within 12 months of a change of control, the Director is entitled to 

a payment of 12 months’ basic salary (less any payment for, or in lieu of, notice). 

 • As such, a Director giving notice following a change of control would be entitled to a payment of 12 months’ basic salary, rather than six months. 
Any additional payment is made one month following cessation of employment with no mitigation in the event of alternative employment. 

The practical implications of the new provisions are that on a change of control the notice period for an Executive Director extends from 6 months 
to 12 months, and the extent to which mitigation can be applied is more limited. Note that, notwithstanding the provisions, the payments to 
Executive Directors on a change of control would not exceed 12 months’ salary and benefits.

The Remuneration Committee have determined that these special provisions will not be included in the contracts for new Executive Directors, 
and have not been included in the service contract of the new CEO appointment.

EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS

No Executive Directors held any external directorships during the year and do not hold any at the date of this report.

54

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

PERFORMANCE GRAPH AND CEO REMUNERATION TABLE

The graph below sets out the TSR performance of the Company and of the FTSE SmallCap Index. The SmallCap is considered to be the most 
appropriate comparator as the Company is a constituent of this index. The chart further shows TSR for FTSE All-Share excluding investment trusts 
as this is the comparator group for measuring TSR performance under the LTIP.

Wincanton TSR vs. the FTSE SmallCap and the FTSE All-Share xIT – Value of £100 invested on 31 March 2009 (£)
450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

Mar
2009

Mar
2010

Mar
2011

Mar
2012

Mar
2013

Mar
2014

Mar
2015

Mar
2016

Mar
2017

Wincanton

FTSE AllShare xIT

FTSE Small Cap

Mar
2018

Mar
2019

Source: Datastream

The table below sets out the total remuneration paid and the proportion vesting under Annual Bonus and Long Term Incentive Plans, as a percentage 
of the maximum that could have been achieved in each year of the same period as set out in the graph above, for the Chief Executive Officer:

Year ended 31 March
2019
2018
2017
2016
2016
2015
2014
2013
2012
2011
2011
2010

Chief Executive
Adrian Colman
Adrian Colman
Adrian Colman
Adrian Colman2
Eric Born2
Eric Born
Eric Born
Eric Born
Eric Born
Eric Born5
Graeme McFaull5
Graeme McFaull

Chief Executive single figure 
of total remuneration  
£’000
1,498
1,9331
2,008
1,653
3,750
2,051
1,264
893
710
249
397
655

Annual Bonus outturn  
(% of maximum)
65%
56%
73%
61%3
–
56%
68%4
69%4
41%4
0%
0%
64%6

LTIP vesting 
(% of maximum)
84%
98%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
n/a
0%
9%

1  For the year ended 31 March 2018, the LTIP figure has been updated for the actual share price on the date of vesting of the 2015 LTIP.

2  Adrian Colman was appointed on 1 August 2015. Eric Born resigned on 31 July 2015. These figures contain pro-rated remuneration in respect of each Director according to the period served.

3  Adrian Colman’s Annual Bonus outcome for 2016 reflects the pro-rated element attributable to the period served as Chief Executive Officer.

4  The maximum opportunity for ‘single figure’ purposes was 200% of salary. 50% of bonus is deferred in shares which vest subject to performance and are therefore defined as a long term incentive.

5  Eric Born was appointed on 14 December 2010. Graeme McFaull resigned on 14 December 2010. These figures contain pro-rated remuneration in respect of each Director according 

to the period served.

6  The maximum opportunity for ‘single figure’ purposes was 25% of salary. 75% of bonus was deferred in shares which vested subject to performance and are therefore defined 

as a long term incentive.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

55

Directors’  
remuneration report

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

PERCENTAGE CHANGE IN CHIEF EXECUTIVE REMUNERATION

The table below sets out the percentage change in salary, benefits and annual bonus awarded to the Chief Executive Officer between the year 
ended 31 March 2018 and year ended 31 March 2019, compared to the change for all colleagues. We have moved from using management level 
employees in last year’s report to all colleagues, to provide a fuller picture of the remuneration environment across the organisation.

Salary
Taxable benefits
Annual Bonus

2018/19  
£’000
445 
26
438

CEO

2017/18  
£’000
439 
26 
369 

Increase
1.4%
–
18.7%

Average change 
for employees
3.4%1
6.3%
52%

1  The calculation of the average change in salary for employees excludes joiners and leavers during the year.

RELATIVE IMPORTANCE OF SPEND ON PAY

The table below sets out the change in total remuneration of all employees and dividends paid to shareholders from year ended 31 March 2018 
to year ended 31 March 2019.

Item
Remuneration of all employees1
Dividend or share buyback2

1  Includes all personnel expenses, as set out in Note 5 to the consolidated financial statements.

2  A final dividend of 7.29p per share is proposed in respect of the financial year ended 31 March 2019 (31 March 2018: 6.63p).

EXTERNAL ADVISERS

31 March 2019 
£m
556.6
13.5

31 March 2018 
£m
542.0
12.2

Difference 
£m
14.6
1.3

During the year, external advisers attended Committee meetings upon invitation to provide advice and support to the Committee.

Mercer Kepler were retained as advisers to the Committee to 8 January 2019. During the year the Committee undertook a competitive tender process 
and appointed Deloitte LLP as its adviser, effective from 9 January 2019. 

Deloitte LLP is a founding member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and a signatory to the Code of Conduct for Remuneration Consultants. 
For more detail please refer to the website, www.remunerationconsultantsgroup.com. The Committee is comfortable that Deloitte LLP provides 
objective and independent remuneration advice and has no conflicts of interest with the Group that may impair its independence.

Total fees payable to Mercer Kepler for advice provided to the Committee during the year amounted to £79,085 (2018: £24,455). Mercer Kepler 
also provided unrelated advice in relation to investment strategy and insurance matters. Fees payable to Deloitte LLP for advice provided to the 
Committee during the year amounted to £40,350. Deloitte LLP provided no other advice. 

STATEMENT OF SHAREHOLDER VOTING

The table below sets out the Company voting outcome of the advisory resolution for approval of the Annual Report on Remuneration 
at the 2018 AGM:

Votes for
68,951,496

%
80.72

Votes against
16,468,927

%
19.28

Total votes
85,420,423

% of issued share  
capital voted
68.59

Votes withheld
553,103

At the Company’s 2017 AGM, the binding resolution for approval of the Remuneration Policy received the following votes:

Votes for
84,198,079

%
99.67

Votes against
274,712

%
0.33

Total votes
84,472,791

% of issued share  
capital voted
67.83

Votes withheld
56,154

The Committee noted concerns raised by our shareholders who felt unable to support the advisory resolution on the 2017/18 Annual Report on 
Remuneration. As detailed in the Committee Chairman’s annual statement on page 44, both the Chairman and the new Remuneration Committee 
Chairman undertook a shareholder consultation exercise during the year to better understand the concerns of our shareholders. One key area 
of feedback was the relationship between pay outcomes and performance. Reflecting feedback, we have made changes to the approach to 
remuneration for the years ended 31 March 2019 and 31 March 2020. 

We will continue to seek the views of shareholders as we review the Remuneration Policy during the forthcoming year.

The Directors’ Remuneration Report has been prepared on behalf of the Board by the Remuneration Committee in accordance with 
the UK Corporate Governance Code, the Listing Rules and the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
(Amendment) Regulations 2013.

56

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY

The Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at the 2017 Annual General Meeting and took effect from 1 July 2017. The policy table has 
been reproduced below for reference. The full Remuneration Policy is contained within the 2017 Annual Report, which can be found on the Company 
website at www.wincanton.co.uk.

Policy table 

Salary

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Salaries are set at a sufficient level to recruit and retain individuals of the necessary quality to deliver 
the Group’s strategy.
Base salaries are normally reviewed annually, with changes effective 1 July.

Salaries are typically set after considering:

 • the responsibilities of each individual role;

 • progression within role;

 • individual performance;

 • an individual’s experience; and

 • salary levels in companies of a similar size and complexity.

Salaries may be adjusted and any increase will ordinarily be (in percentage of salary terms) in line with those 
of the wider workforce.

Increases beyond those granted to the wider workforce may be awarded in certain circumstances such as:

 • where there is a change in responsibility;

 • progression in the role;

 • material market misalignment; or

 • a significant increase in the scale of the role and/or size, value and/or complexity of the Group.

Where increases are awarded in excess of the wider employee population, the Committee will provide 
an explanation in the relevant Annual Report on Remuneration.

Benefits

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

The Group provides the appropriate benefits for Executive Directors in a business of this size in order to recruit 
and retain individuals of the necessary quality to deliver the Group’s strategy.
Benefits include but are not limited to:

 • Company car or car allowance;

 • Private medical insurance for the Executive Director and their direct family;

 • Personal accident and travel insurance; and

 • Death in service cover.

In addition, relocation assistance is available on a case by case basis. Assistance may include, but is not limited to, 
facilitating and/or meeting the costs of removal and other relocation costs, children’s education, a limited amount 
of family travel and tax equalisation arrangements and may extend to facilitating and/or meeting the costs of 
re-establishing them to their previous location at the end of the employment or assignment.
Benefits vary by role and individual circumstance and eligibility is reviewed periodically. Benefits are not anticipated 
to exceed 10% of salary per annum over the period for which this policy applies. The Committee retains the 
discretion to approve a higher cost in exceptional circumstances (e.g. relocation) or in circumstances where 
factors outside of the Group’s control have materially changed (e.g. costs of medical premiums). If this occurs, 
the Committee will provide details and rationale in the relevant Annual Report on Remuneration.

Opportunity

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

57

Directors’  
remuneration report

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY CONTINUED

All employee share plans

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation of all employee 
share plans

Opportunity

Pension

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation of pension 
arrangements

Opportunity

Annual Bonus

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Opportunity

Performance measure

Recovery provisions

The Company encourages voluntary participation in share ownership throughout the Group where share plans 
are appropriate.
Under the current all employee share plan arrangements, Executive Directors are entitled to participate in the 
Company’s Share Incentive Plan (SIP).

Participants make monthly contributions from their gross salary to buy Partnership Shares. The Company currently 
awards one Matching Share for every four Partnership Shares acquired. In addition, any dividends paid in respect of 
shares held under the SIP are used to buy Dividend Shares.
In line with HMRC limits, the rules of the Company’s SIP set out the following maximum levels, which may be 
amended from time to time so that they are in line with legislation:

Free Shares – The maximum value of Free Shares per tax year is £3,600.

Partnership Shares bought by employees – The maximum pre-tax salary that can be used to buy Partnership Shares 
is £1,800 per annum.

Matching Shares – The Company can match employees’ Partnership Share purchases by giving them additional 
shares. The maximum award of Matching Shares is two Matching Shares for each Partnership Share bought. 
The Company currently awards one Matching Share for every four Partnership Shares bought.

The Group provides the appropriate pension provision for Executive Directors in a business of this size in order 
to recruit and retain individuals of the necessary quality to deliver the Group’s strategy.
Executive Directors are entitled to join the defined contribution section of the Wincanton plc Pension Scheme. 
In certain circumstances, for example where the annual allowance level set by HMRC is exceeded, the pension 
provision will be in the form of a taxable cash supplement.
Up to 22% of pensionable salary for existing Directors, reducing to 15% of pensionable salary for appointments 
of Executive Directors from 1 July 2017.

The aim of the annual bonus is to incentivise and recognise the Executive Directors annual contribution to the 
delivery of the Group’s strategy by rewarding performance against stretching financial and strategic objectives; 
and reinforce achievement of the shareholding requirement.
Performance is measured over each financial year. Performance measure weightings and individual objectives 
are reviewed prior to the start of the financial year to ensure they remain appropriate and reinforce the business 
strategy. Performance targets are set annually to ensure they are appropriately stretching and reflect those strategic 
objectives. At the end of the year, the Committee determines the extent to which these targets were achieved.

The annual bonus is normally settled in cash. However, if the share ownership guideline is yet to be achieved, any 
annual bonus earned above 100% of salary must be used by the Executive Director to purchase Wincanton shares 
until the share ownership guideline is achieved. All bonus awards are at the discretion of the Committee.
An Executive Director’s annual bonus cannot exceed 150% of salary.

A bonus of up to 25% of maximum is payable for ‘Threshold’ performance, 50% of maximum for ‘Target’ 
performance and up to 100% of the bonus is earned for ‘Maximum’ performance, with straight-line vesting 
in between.
Annual performance is typically based on achievement of profit targets and strategic objectives.

Normally, the Committee would expect the profit element to have a minimum weighting of 60% and a maximum 
weighting of 80%, and achievement of strategic objectives to have a minimum weighting of 20% and a maximum 
weighting of 40%. However, it retains discretion to adjust weightings to align with the business plan for each year.

In exceptional circumstances, the Committee have the ability to exercise discretion to override the formulaic bonus 
outcome within the limits of the plan where it believes the outcome is not truly reflective of performance and to 
ensure fairness to both shareholders and participants.
Clawback and malus provisions exist in respect of misstatements and misconduct.

58

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

Long term incentives

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Opportunity

Performance measures

Recovery provisions

Shareholding guidelines

Purpose and link to strategy
Operation

Non-executive Directors

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Opportunity

The aim of the long term incentive is to incentivise and recognise the performance of Executive Directors in respect 
of their contribution to the delivery of the Group’s strategy over the longer term by rewarding strong financial 
performance and sustained increase in shareholder value.
Performance is measured over a period of no less than three years.

The Committee reviews the performance measure weightings ahead of each award to ensure alignment 
with Wincanton’s strategy and has discretion to adjust weightings to ensure alignment to that strategy. 
Performance targets are reviewed ahead of each performance period and the Committee has discretion to adjust 
targets to ensure they remain appropriate and stretching. Targets are set having regard to a number of internal and 
external reference points.

Awards may be granted as nil cost options or conditional share awards. Dividends or dividend equivalents may 
accrue on LTIP awards and be paid in shares or cash on those shares which vest.
Maximum award levels for Executive Directors are 100% of salary. In exceptional circumstances, for example on 
recruitment, individual awards may be granted up to 250% of salary.

Up to 25% of an award vests for ‘Threshold’ performance and 100% of an award vests for ‘Maximum’ performance.
Performance measures for 2018 awards will be TSR relative to an appropriate comparator group and EPS growth, 
weighted 40% and 60% respectively. The Committee will review the performance measures, their weightings and 
performance targets in advance of each award to ensure alignment with strategy.

In exceptional circumstances, the Committee has the ability to exercise discretion to override the formulaic 
performance outcome downwards to ensure alignment of pay with the underlying performance of the business 
during the performance period.
Clawback and malus provisions exist in respect of vested and unvested awards in circumstances of misstatement 
and misconduct.

Shareholding guidelines ensure alignment between Executive Directors and shareholders.
Shareholding guidelines are for any new Executive Director to accrue and then maintain a holding of shares with 
a value of 150% of their salary as assessed by the Committee from time to time. For Executive Directors in place 
before 1 April 2015, the shareholding guideline is 300% of salary. Any bonus achieved in excess of 100% of salary will 
be required to be used to purchase shares until the shareholding guideline is met.

The Company seeks to attract and retain a high calibre Chairman and Non-executive Directors by offering market 
competitive fee levels.
On the appointment of a new Chairman or Non-executive Director, the fees will be set taking into account the 
experience and calibre of the individual.

Neither the Chairman nor the Non-executive Directors participate in any of the Company’s short or long term 
incentive arrangements, nor do they receive benefits or pension provision. They are however, reimbursed for 
reasonable costs incurred in carrying out their role.

The Chairman receives an annual fee. The Non-executive Directors receive an annual base fee and additional fees 
are paid to reflect additional responsibilities, such as chairing a Board Committee.

The Chairman and Non-executive Directors receive their annual fee paid in monthly instalments. The fee of the 
Chairman is set by the Committee and the fees of the Non-executive Directors are approved by the Board, on the 
recommendation of the Chairman and Chief Executive.
Fee levels are reviewed on a periodic basis, and may be increased taking into account factors such as the time 
commitment of the role and market levels in companies of a similar size and complexity. Fees for the Chairman 
and Non-executive Directors will not exceed the limit as set out in the Company’s Articles of Association 
(£500,000 in aggregate as at the date of this report).

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

59

Directors’ report

DIRECTORS’ REPORT

The Company
Wincanton plc is a company incorporated 
in England and Wales, with company 
number 04178808.

Constitution
The Company’s Articles of Association may 
only be amended by a special resolution at 
a general meeting of shareholders.

Principal activities
Wincanton plc is the ultimate parent Company 
of the Group and trades principally through its 
subsidiary undertakings. The Group is a leading 
provider of logistics and supply chain solutions 
in the UK and Ireland. All subsidiaries of the 
Company are listed in Note 12 on pages 90 
and 91.

Review of business and 
future developments
The business review and details of future 
developments are contained within the 
Strategic Report on pages 1 to 33.

Compliance Reporting
Directors’ Report content
The Strategic Report, Corporate Governance 
Report and Directors’ Remuneration report are 
all incorporated by reference into this report 
and accordingly, should be read as part of 
this report.

Strategic report
The Company is required to prepare a Strategic 
Report to give a balanced and fair review of 
the Group’s business during the year ended 
31 March 2019, to enable shareholders to assess 
how the Directors have performed their duty 
under Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006.

The information that fulfils the requirements of 
the Strategic Report can be found on pages 1 
to 33, and includes reviews of the business and 
financial performance and the principal risks 
and uncertainties facing the Group. 

Within the Strategic Report, a summary review 
of the Group’s activities during the financial 
year along with its future prospects are 
contained in the Chairman’s review on page 2. 
Details of the Group’s business goals, strategy 
and model are set out on pages 8 and 9 
and 13 to 16.

Corporate Governance reporting
Details of the Company’s compliance with 
the UK Corporate Governance Code 2016 (the 
Code), the disclosures required under the Code 
and the UK Listing Rules can be found in the 
Corporate Governance Report on page 37. 
The corporate governance statement required 
by Rule 7.2.1 of the FCA’s Disclosure Guidance 
and Transparency Rules is set out on page 37.

Contracts and transactions
The Company is not aware of any significant 
agreements to which it is party that take 
effect, alter or terminate upon a change of 
control of the Company following a takeover. 
The Company is not aware of any contractual 
or other agreement, which is essential to 
its business and should be disclosed in 
this Directors’ report.

Events after the balance sheet date
There were no reportable events after the 
balance sheet date.

Equity Disclosures
Share capital
The Company’s issued share capital as the date 
of this report was 124,543,670 Ordinary shares 
of 10p each. 

Authority to purchase shares
The Company was authorised at the 2018 AGM 
to purchase its own shares within certain limits. 
During the year ended 31 March 2019, the 
Company purchased 600,000 of its own shares 
under this authority. All shares purchased 
were gifted to the Company’s Employee 
Benefit Trust to satisfy future exercise of awards 
under the Company’s employee incentive 
schemes. The Directors will seek renewal of 
their authority to purchase in the market the 
Company’s shares at the 2019 AGM.

Shareholders’ rights
Each Ordinary Share of the Company carries 
one vote at general meetings of the Company. 
There are no restrictions on the transfer of 
Ordinary Shares in the capital of the Company 
other than certain restrictions, which may from 
time to time be imposed by law. In accordance 
with the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct 
Authority, certain employees are required 
to seek approval of the Company to deal in 
its shares.

Employees who participate in the SIP, whose 
shares are held in the Employee Benefit Trust, 
give directions to the trustees to vote on their 
behalf by way of a Form of Direction.

The Company is not aware of any agreements 
between shareholders that may result in 
restrictions on the transfer of securities and/or 
voting rights.

Management report
For the purposes of Rule 4.1.5R(2) and Rule 
4.18 of the FCA’s Disclosure Guidance and 
Transparency Rules, this Directors’ Report and 
the Strategic Report on pages 60 to 62 and 1 to 
33 together comprise the Management report.

Accounting policies, financial instruments 
and risk 
Details of the Group’s accounting policies, 
together with details of financial instruments 
and financial risks are provided in Note 27 of 
the Group financial statements, on pages 101 
to 104.

Directors
The Directors during the year and to the date 
of this report, are:

Executive Directors
Adrian Colman, Chief Executive Officer 
Tim Lawlor, Chief Financial Officer

Non-executive Directors
Dr. Martin Read CBE, Chairman 
Stewart Oades, Senior Independent Director 
Paul Dean  
David Radcliffe  
Gill Barr 
Martin Sawkins (retired 31 December 2018)

The rules governing the appointment and 
replacement of Directors are set out in the 
Company’s Articles of Association.

At the 2019 AGM, six of the Directors will offer 
themselves for re-election. Dr. Martin Read CBE 
and Debbie Lentz are proposed for election 
to the Board in accordance with the Code. 
Biographical details of all Directors are set out 
on pages 34 and 35.

Details of the service contracts of the Executive 
Directors and the letters of appointment for 
the Non-executive Directors are set out in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy on page 44. 

Financial Disclosures
Going concern
After making enquiries, the Directors have a 
reasonable expectation that the Company 
and the Group have adequate resources to 
continue in business for the foreseeable future. 
The financial statements are therefore prepared 
on a going concern basis. Further details 
of the Group’s liquidity position and going 
concern review are provided in Notes 27 and 1 
respectively to the Group financial statements.

Results and dividends
The Group profit attributable to equity 
shareholders for the financial year amounted to 
£42.8m. The Directors propose a final dividend 
of 7.29p per Ordinary Share for the year ended 
31 March 2019 (2018: 6.63p per Ordinary Share). 
If approved by the shareholders at the 2019 
AGM, this would bring the total dividend paid 
for the year ended 31 March 2019 to £13.5m.

60

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

Shareholder

Aberforth Partners
Columbia Threadneedle Investments
Schroder Investment Management
Tellworth Investments
Unicorn Asset Management
M&G Investment Management
Polar Capital

Substantial shareholdings
At the date of this report, the Company has 
been notified of the major shareholdings set 
out in the table above. Both the number of 
shares held and the percentage holding are 
stated as at the latest date of notification to 
the Company.
Greenhouse gas emissions

The disclosures concerning greenhouse gas 
emissions required by law are included in the 
Corporate Responsibility Report, on page 25.
Charitable donations

During the year ended 31 March 2019, the 
Group contributed £10,600 (2018: £nil) to 
charitable and community programmes. 
Political donations

No political donations were made during the 
year (2018: nil).
Annual General Meeting

The Company’s AGM will be held at 11:00am 
on Thursday, 27 June 2019 at the offices of 
Buchanan Communications, 107 Cheapside, 
London EC2V 6DN. The Notice of Annual 
General Meeting 2019, which contains full 
explanations of the business to be conducted 
at the AGM, is set out in a separate AGM 
Notice addressed to shareholders, and 
can be found on the Company’s website 
(www.wincanton.co.uk).
External Auditor

At the 2018 AGM, resolutions to re-appoint 
KPMG LLP as the Company’s Auditor 
and to authorise the Directors to fix their 
remuneration, were approved by shareholders.

The Board will propose a resolution at the 
2019 AGM for shareholders to approve the 
re-appointment of KPMG LLP as the Company’s 
Auditor for the year ended 31 March 2020 and 
authority to fix their remuneration.

Type of  
holding

Number of  
shares held

Holding (% of 
issued share 
capital)

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ 
RESPONSIBILITIES

Indirect
Indirect
Indirect
Indirect
Indirect
Indirect
Indirect

21,463,767
19,809,966
9,161,547
5,276,896
4,930,000
4,726,471
4,651,803

17.23
15.91
7.36
4.24
3.96
3.80
3.74

Employee Disclosures

Wincanton is an inclusive and equal 
opportunities employer. The Group is 
committed to ensuring that disabled persons 
are treated with dignity and respect and 
that we act in accordance with the Equality 
Act 2010. Wincanton gives full and fair 
consideration to applications for employment 
by disabled persons and provides the 
necessary support to colleagues in our 
employment with a disability. Training, career 
development and promotion are equally 
applied regardless of disability or any other 
individual attribute.

On behalf of the Board

Raj Sharma
Company Secretary
15 May 2019

The Directors are responsible for preparing 
the Annual Report and Group and parent 
Company financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to 
prepare Group and parent Company financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that 
law, they are required to prepare the Group 
financial statements in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting Standards 
as adopted by the European Union (IFRSs as 
adopted by the EU) and applicable law and 
have elected to prepare the parent Company 
financial statements in accordance with UK 
Accounting Standards, including FRS 101 
Reduced Disclosure Framework.

Under company law, the Directors must not 
approve the financial statements unless they 
are satisfied that they give a true and fair view 
of the state of affairs of the Group and parent 
Company and of their profit or loss for that 
period. In preparing each of the Group and 
parent Company financial statements, the 
Directors are required to:
 • select suitable accounting policies and then 

apply them consistently;

 • make judgements and estimates that are 
reasonable, relevant, reliable and prudent;
 • for the Group financial statements, state 
whether they have been prepared in 
accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU;
 • for the parent Company financial statements, 
state whether applicable UK Accounting 
Standards have been followed, subject to any 
material departures disclosed and explained 
in the parent Company financial statements;

 • assess the Group and parent Company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern, 
disclosing, as applicable, matters related 
to going concern; and 

 • use the going concern basis of accounting 
unless they either intend to liquidate the 
Group or the parent Company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative 
but to do so.

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are sufficient 
to show and explain the parent Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position 
of the parent Company and enable them to 
ensure that its financial statements comply with 
the Companies Act 2006. They are responsible 
for such internal control as they determine 
is necessary to enable the preparation of 
financial statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and 
have general responsibility for taking such steps 
as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the 
assets of the Group and to prevent and detect 
fraud and other irregularities.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

61

Directors’ report

DIRECTORS’ REPORT CONTINUED

Under applicable law and regulations, the 
Directors are also responsible for preparing a 
Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, Directors’ 
Remuneration Report and Corporate 
Governance Statement that comply with 
that law and those regulations.

The Directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the corporate 
and financial information included on the 
Company’s website. Legislation in the UK 
governing the preparation and dissemination 
of financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement of the 
Directors in respect of the annual 
financial report 
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

 • the financial statements, prepared in 
accordance with the applicable set of 
accounting standards, give a true and fair 
view of the assets, liabilities, financial position 
and profit or loss of the Company and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation 
taken as a whole; and

 • the Strategic Report and the Directors’ 
Report include a fair review of the 
development and performance of the 
business and the position of the issuer 
and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole, together 
with a description of the principal risks 
and uncertainties that they face.

We consider the Annual Report and Accounts, 
taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and 
understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the 
Group’s position and performance, business 
model and strategy.

The Directors approved the above 
responsibility statement on 15 May 2019.

Tim Lawlor
Chief Financial Officer

Wincanton plc 
Registered in England and Wales No. 04178808

STATEMENT ON THE MODERN 
SLAVERY ACT

Wincanton is committed to the highest 
possible ethical standards and corporate 
conduct and we expect our suppliers to adhere 
to these same standards. The Group requires 
companies across our extended supply chain 
to understand and meet our expectations 
on anti-bribery, corruption, legal compliance 
and ethical conduct. 

To this end, the following statement is offered 
in compliance with the Modern Slavery Act 
2015 and sets out the Group’s approach to 
the prohibition of any form of forced labour 
or slavery within our supply chain. 

Once the law came into effect in 2015, 
Wincanton carefully reviewed its employment 
and procurement practices to ensure they 
were in line with the new legal requirements. 
The Group laid down four strategic measures 
that the Company had taken or was in the 
process of taking to meet the requirements of 
the new law, specifically: 

1. produce and communicate a Modern Slavery 

Strategy Statement and Policy;

2. carry out a compliance assessment of 

current suppliers;

3. embed additional due diligence into our 

procurement activities; and

4. review our Group-wide employment 

practices and processes, including the use 
of agencies.

Following on from the activities set out in our 
statement last year, there has been continued 
progress and activities to deliver the four 
strategic steps during the year ended 31 March 
2019 as set out below: 

1. Strategy statement and policy 
During the year ended 31 March 2019, the 
Group’s HR function, in conjunction with our 
external legal advisers, have reviewed the 
Statement and Policy and related policies 
to ensure they remain compliant and fit for 
purpose. They have also continued to oversee, 
communicate and provide training on the 
Group’s expectations and responsibilities 
of employees.

2. Assessment of current suppliers
This year, the Group has embedded its 
approach of assessing its current suppliers 
by size and risk. Those suppliers identified as 
being of highest risk have been requested to 
provide details of their strategy and approach 
to compliance with both the legislation and, 
furthermore, the Wincanton Supplier Code. 
Responses from these suppliers have been 
reviewed and a continued assessment of 
suppliers is being undertaken.

3. Procurement due diligence
The Supplier Code, designed to drive 
higher ethical standards, above and beyond 
compliance requirements and regardless of 
size, is also now fully embedded. Any supplier 
wishing to do business with Wincanton 
must comply with the Supplier Code, which 
forms a standard part of Wincanton’s supply 
contracts and terms of purchase (as issued on 
all purchase orders). The Supplier Code can be 
downloaded on the Group’s website. 

As with prior years, the Procurement function 
continues to incorporate due diligence into 
its pre-qualification process, when tendering 
and procuring new suppliers and undertaking 
renewals of all types and sizes. Supply areas 
identified as specifically high risk are continually 
assessed with suppliers asked to provide details 
of their policies to ensure compliance with 
the legislation. 

62

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

4. Employment practices
The Group’s employment practices and 
processes have been thoroughly reviewed and 
updated where necessary with the support of 
external legal advice. These updated policies 
and practices have been communicated 
and cascaded throughout the Group. 
The designated HR teams have also provided 
localised training and support to all Group 
employees. In addition, the Group HR function 
is currently working on an enhanced Code of 
Conduct that will summarise all of the Group’s 
key policies and standards with the intention 
of delivering a Group-wide roll out of the new 
Code in 2019. The Group has also started a 
project to consider the specific risks associated 
with the use of agencies and new standards in 
this area have been agreed. Further revisions to 
the Group’s employment policies and practices 
are underway and the work will be completed 
and rolled out throughout the Group and its 
network of agency suppliers in 2019. 

The delivery of these four strategic measures 
is a core component of the ongoing legal 
compliance of our practices and processes. 
These measures are also underpinned by the 
Group’s established processes for corporate 
governance. The Group reviews its policies 
and process at least annually, to ensure they 
remain relevant, up-to-date and compliant 
with prevailing legislation. Moreover, all of 
our policies and procedures are designed to 
recognise and further elevate the importance 
of the highest behavioural standards and 
ethical conduct for all of our stakeholders, 
as a reflection of the Group’s values and the 
prominence of social responsibility within our 
business and our extended supply chain. 

In common with all other regulatory and legal 
requirements, as a Group, we expect and are 
prepared for the fact that the nature, root 
causes and circumstances that cause instances 
of modern slavery and human trafficking will 
change over time. The Group will continue to 
be vigilant and proactive in this area and will 
closely monitor and regularly review the four 
strategic measures and any influencing factors, 
to ensure our Group policies and practices 
remain fit for purpose and address any new 
risks that may emerge. 

The Directors approved the above statement 
on 15 May 2019. 

Raj Sharma
Company Secretary

Wincanton plc 
Registered in England and Wales No. 04178808

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT

(cid:44)(cid:81)(cid:71)(cid:72)(cid:83)(cid:72)(cid:81)(cid:71)(cid:72)(cid:81)(cid:87)(cid:3)
(cid:68)(cid:88)(cid:71)(cid:76)(cid:87)(cid:82)(cid:85)(cid:210)(cid:86)(cid:3)(cid:85)(cid:72)(cid:83)(cid:82)(cid:85)(cid:87)

to the members of Wincanton plc  

We were first appointed as auditor by the Directors in 
March 2001.  The period of total uninterrupted 
engagement is for the 19 financial years ended 31 March 
2019.  We have fulfilled our ethical responsibilities under, 
and we remain independent of the Group in accordance 
with, UK ethical requirements including the FRC Ethical 
Standard as applied to listed public interest entities. No 
non-audit services prohibited by that standard were 
provided.  

Overview

Materiality: 
group financial 
statements as a 
whole

£2.2 million (2018:£2.0 million)

4.5% of Group profit before 
taxation (2018: 4.5% of Group 
profit before taxation)

*  Normalised to exclude exceptional items as 
disclosed in Note 4

Coverage

100% (2018:100%) of Group profit 
before tax

Key audit matters                          

vs 2018

Recurring risks

Group pension obligation

Revenue recognition

Recoverability of Parent 
Company’s investment in 
subsidiaries

(cid:379)(cid:377)

(cid:379)(cid:377)

(cid:379)(cid:377)

1. Our opinion is unmodified

We have audited the financial statements of 
Wincanton plc (“the Company”) for the year ended 
31 March 2019 which comprise the consolidated 
income statement, consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income, consolidated and company 
balance sheet, consolidated and company 
statement of changes in equity, consolidated 
statement of cash flows and the related notes, 
including the accounting policies in note 1. 

In our opinion:  

— the financial statements give a true and fair 
view of the state of the Group’s and of the 
parent Company’s affairs as at 31 March 2019 
and of the Group’s profit for the year then 
ended;  

— the Group financial statements have been 
properly prepared in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting Standards as 
adopted by the European Union;  

— the parent Company financial statements have 
been properly prepared in accordance with UK 
accounting standards, including FRS 101 
Reduced Disclosure Framework; and  

— the financial statements have been prepared in 
accordance with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group 
financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS 
Regulation. 

Basis for opinion  

We conducted our audit in accordance with 
International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs 
(UK)”) and applicable law.  Our responsibilities are 
described below.  We believe that the audit 
evidence we have obtained is a sufficient and 
appropriate basis for our opinion.  Our audit opinion 
is consistent with our report to the audit 
committee.  

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

63

Independent  
auditor’s report

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED

2. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in the audit of the financial 
statements and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified 
by us, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and 
directing the efforts of the engagement team.  We summarise below the key audit matters (unchanged from 2018), in 
decreasing order of audit significance, in arriving at our audit opinion above, together with our key audit procedures to address 
those matters and, as required for public interest entities, our results from those procedures. These matters were addressed, 
and our results are based on procedures undertaken, in the context of, and solely for the purpose of, our audit of the financial
statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and consequently are incidental to that opinion, and we do not 
provide a separate opinion on these matters.  

Group gross funded defined 
benefit obligations

£ 1,151.2 million 
(2018: £1,123.1 million)

Refer to page 42 (Audit 
Committee Report), page 78 
(accounting policy) and pages 96 
to 99 (financial disclosures).

The risk

Our response

Subjective valuation

Our procedures included: 

Significant estimates are made in 
determining the key assumptions used 
in valuing the Group's gross funded 
defined benefit obligations.  When 
making these assumptions the directors 
take independent actuarial advice 
relating to their appropriateness.  

The valuation of the gross funded 
defined benefit obligations is considered 
a significant risk given the quantum of 
the gross pension obligation and that a 
small change in assumptions can have a 
material financial impact on the Group.

— Benchmarking assumptions: challenging, 
with the support of our actuarial specialists, 
the key assumptions applied, being the 
discount rate, inflation rate and mortality/life 
expectancy, by comparison against 
externally derived data.

— Assessing transparency: considering the 
adequacy of the Group's disclosures in 
respect of the sensitivity of the obligation to 
these assumptions.

Our results:  

— We found the valuation of the gross funded 
defined benefit obligations to be acceptable 
(2018 result: acceptable). 

Revenue recognition

2019/2020 sales

Our procedures included: 

£1,141.5 million 
(2018: £1,171.9 million)

Refer to page 79 (accounting 
policy) and pages 82 to 84
(financial disclosures).

Wincanton issue invoices based on the 
accounting period of its customers 
which are not necessarily co-terminus 
with that of Wincanton. 

— Controls design: assessing the design and 
implementation of key controls over the 
accuracy of accrued and deferred income 
amounts. 

There is a risk that revenues could be  
recognised in the incorrect accounting 
period due to the relative complexity 
arising from the interaction of 
Wincanton’s accounting period and 
those of its customers around the year-
end. We have included this risk within 
our report due to the significant levels of 
work performed throughout the audit. 

— Enquiry of customers: obtaining a sample 
of customer confirmations of invoiced 
amounts and service delivery for activity 
before and after the year end as a basis for 
recalculating revenue recognition for the 
period.

— Test of details: recalculating a sample of 

accrued and deferred income balances using 
customer confirmations and their respective 
accounting calendars. 

Our results: 

— We found the resulting amount of recorded 
Group’s revenue to be acceptable (2018 
result: acceptable).

64

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

2. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement (continued)

Recoverability of parent 
company’s investment in 
subsidiaries  

£108.9 million
(2018: £108.9 million)
Refer to page 108 (accounting 
policy and financial disclosures). 

The risk

Our response

Low risk, high value

Our procedures included: 

The carrying amount of the parent 
company’s investments in subsidiaries 
represents 59% (2018: 55%) of the 
company’s total assets. Their 
recoverability is not at a high risk of 
significant misstatement or subject to 
significant judgement.  However, due 
to their materiality in the context of the 
parent company financial statements, 
this is considered to be the area that 
had the greatest effect on our overall 
parent company audit.

—

—

Tests of detail: Comparing the carrying 
amount of 100% of investments with 
the relevant subsidiaries’ balance sheet 
to identify whether their net assets, 
being an approximation of their 
minimum recoverable amount, were in 
excess of their carrying amount and 
assessing whether those subsidiaries 
have historically been profit-making.

Assessing subsidiary audits:
Assessing the evidence obtained during 
our audit of components, as part of the 
Group audit, and considering the results 
of that work on their profits and net 
assets.

Our results:

—

We found the group’s assessment of 
the recoverability of the investment in 
subsidiaries to be acceptable (2018 
result: acceptable).

We continue to perform procedures over the property provision. However, following a continued reduction in remaining lease 
periods and the number of properties affected, we have not assessed this as one of the most significant risks in our current 
year audit and, therefore, it is not separately identified in our report this year. 

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

65

Independent  
auditor’s report

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED

3. Our application of materiality and an 
overview of the scope of our audit

Group profit before taxation*
£49.3m (2018: £44.1m)

Group materiality
£2.2m (2018: £2.0m)

The materiality for the Group financial statements 
as a whole was set at £2.2 million (2018: £2.0 
million), determined with reference to a 
benchmark of Group profit before taxation, 
normalised in 2019 to exclude one-off exceptional 
items of £0.7 million (2018: £6.2 million) as 
disclosed in note 4 to the financial statements, of 
which it represents 4.5% (2018: 4.5%) of £49.3 
million normalised profit before tax (2018: £44.1 
million normalised profit before tax). The group 
team performed procedures on the items 
excluded from normalised group profit before tax. 
Materiality for the parent company financial 
statements as a whole was set at £1.0 million 
(2018: £1.0 million) by reference to component 
materiality. This is lower than the materiality we 
would otherwise have determined by reference 
to total assets, and represents 0.5% of the 
Company's total assets (2018: 0.5%). 

We agreed to report to the Audit Committee any 
corrected or uncorrected identified 
misstatements exceeding £0.1 million (2018: £0.1 
million), in addition to other identified 
misstatements that warranted reporting on 
qualitative grounds. 

With the exception of the Guernsey component 
(Risk Underwriting (Guernsey) Limited), the Group 
team performed the audit of the Group as if it 
was a single aggregated set of financial 
information using the materiality level set out 
above. The audit of the parent company was 
conducted by the Group team. 

The Group team instructed the component 
auditor as to the significant areas to be covered, 
including the relevant risks detailed above and the 
information to be reported back. The Group team 
approved the component materiality of £1.0 
million (2018: £1.0 million) having regard to the 
mix of size and risk profile of the Group. 

Overall, the audit of the Group covered 100% 
(2018: 100%) of total Group revenue, Group profit 
before tax, and total Group assets. 

Telephone conference meetings were held with 
the component auditor. At these meetings, the 
findings reported to the Group team were 
discussed in more detail, and any further work 
required by the Group team was then performed 
by the component auditor. 

£2.2 million
Whole financial
statements materiality
(2018: £2.0m)

£1.0 million
Component materiality
(2018: £1.0 million)

Normalised Group PBT

Group materiality

*normalised to exclude one-off 
exceptional items of £0.7 million 
(2018: £6.2 million)

£0.1 million
Identified misstatements
reported to the audit 
committee (2018: £0.1m)

Group revenue

Group profit before tax

(cid:20)(cid:19)(cid:19)(cid:8)(2018 100%)

(cid:20)(cid:19)(cid:19)(cid:8)(2018 100%)

Group total assets 

Group profit before 
exceptional items and tax

(cid:20)(cid:19)(cid:19)(cid:8)(2018 100%)

(cid:20)(cid:19)(cid:19)(cid:8)(2018 100%)

Key: 

Full scope for group audit purposes 2019

Full scope for group audit purposes 2018

66

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

4.  We have nothing to report on going concern

— the related statement under the Listing Rules set out on 

The Directors have prepared the financial statements on the 
going concern basis as they do not intend to liquidate the 
Company or the Group or to cease their operations, and as 
they have concluded that the Company’s and the Group’s 
financial position means that this is realistic. They have also 
concluded that there are no material uncertainties that 
could have cast significant doubt over their ability to 
continue as a going concern for at least a year from the 
date of approval of the financial statements (“the going 
concern period”).  

Our responsibility is to conclude on the appropriateness of 
the Directors’ conclusions and, had there been a material 
uncertainty related to going concern, to make reference to 
that in this audit report. However, as we cannot predict all 
future events or conditions and as subsequent events may 
result in outcomes that are inconsistent with judgements 
that were reasonable at the time they were made, the 
absence of reference to a material uncertainty in this 
auditor's report is not a guarantee that the Group and the 
Company will continue in operation. 

In our evaluation of the Directors’ conclusions, we 
considered the inherent risks to the Group’s and 
Company’s business model and analysed how those risks 
might affect the Group’s and Company’s financial resources 
or ability to continue operations over the going concern 
period. The risks that we considered most likely to 
adversely affect the Group’s and Company’s available 
financial resources over this period were: 

— Significant deterioration in the UK macroeconomic 
environment leading to the loss of a number of key 
customers or the inability to win customers or renew 
existing contracts;

— Wrongly priced closed book contracts where higher 

volumes and higher costs lead to contracts becoming 
onerous. 

As these were risks that could potentially cast significant 
doubt on the Group’s and the Company's ability to continue 
as a going concern, we considered sensitivities over the 
level of available financial resources indicated by the 
Group’s financial forecasts taking account of reasonably 
possible (but not unrealistic) adverse effects that could arise 
from these risks individually and collectively and evaluated 
the achievability of the actions the Directors consider they 
would take to improve the position should the risks 
materialise. We also considered less predictable but 
realistic second order impacts, such as the impact of Brexit 
and the erosion of customer or supplier confidence, which 
could result in a rapid reduction of available financial 
resources.

Based on this work, we are required to report to you if:

— we have anything material to add or draw attention to in 
relation to the directors’ statement in Note 1 to the 
financial statements on the use of the going concern 
basis of accounting with no material uncertainties that 
may cast significant doubt over the Group and 
Company’s use of that basis for a period of at least 
twelve months from the date of approval of the financial 
statements; or

page 60 is materially inconsistent with our audit 
knowledge.

We have nothing to report in these respects, and we did 
not identify going concern as a key audit matter. 

5. We have nothing to report on the other information 

in the Annual Report

The directors are responsible for the other information 
presented in the Annual Report together with the financial 
statements.  Our opinion on the financial statements does 
not cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not 
express an audit opinion or, except as explicitly stated 
below, any form of assurance conclusion thereon.  

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in 
doing so, consider whether, based on our financial 
statements audit work, the information therein is materially 
misstated or inconsistent with the financial statements or 
our audit knowledge.  Based solely on that work we have 
not identified material misstatements in the other 
information.

Strategic report and directors’ report 

Based solely on our work on the other information:  

— we have not identified material misstatements in the 

strategic report and the directors’ report;  

— in our opinion the information given in those reports for 

the financial year is consistent with the financial 
statements; and  

— in our opinion those reports have been prepared in 

accordance with the Companies Act 2006.  

Directors’ remuneration report  

In our opinion the part of the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report to be audited has been properly prepared in 
accordance with the Companies Act 2006.  

Disclosures of principal risks and longer-term viability  

Based on the knowledge we acquired during our financial 
statements audit, we have nothing material to add or draw 
attention to in relation to:  

— the directors’ confirmation within the viability statement 
page 31 that they have carried out a robust assessment 
of the principal risks facing the Group, including those 
that would threaten its business model, future 
performance, solvency and liquidity; 

— the Principal Risks disclosures describing these risks and 
explaining how they are being managed and mitigated; 
and  

— the directors’ explanation in the viability statement of 
how they have assessed the prospects of the Group, 
over what period they have done so and why they 
considered that period to be appropriate, and their

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

67

7. Respective responsibilities

Directors’ responsibilities

As explained more fully in their statement set out on page 
61, the directors are responsible for: the preparation of the 
financial statements including being satisfied that they give 
a true and fair view; such internal control as they determine 
is necessary to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error; assessing the Group and 
parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, 
disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern; 
and using the going concern basis of accounting unless 
they either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent 
Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about 
whether the financial statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or other 
irregularities (see below), or error, and to issue our opinion 
in an auditor’s report.  Reasonable assurance is a high level 
of assurance, but does not guarantee that an audit 
conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect 
a material misstatement when it exists.  Misstatements can 
arise from fraud, other irregularities or error and are 
considered material if, individually or in aggregate, they 
could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial 
statements.
A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the 
FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities.

Independent  
auditor’s report

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED

statement as to whether they have a reasonable 
expectation that the Group will be able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the 
period of their assessment, including any related 
disclosures drawing attention to any necessary 
qualifications or assumptions.  

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review the 
viability statement.  We have nothing to report in this 
respect.  

Our work is limited to assessing these matters in the 
context of only the knowledge acquired during our financial 
statements audit.  As we cannot predict all future events or 
conditions and as subsequent events may result in 
outcomes that are inconsistent with judgments that were 
reasonable at the time they were made, the absence of 
anything to report on these statements is not a guarantee 
as to the Group’s and Company’s longer-term viability.

Corporate governance disclosures 

We are required to report to you if: 

— we have identified material inconsistencies between the 
knowledge we acquired during our financial statements 
audit and the directors’ statement that they consider 
that the annual report and financial statements taken as 
a whole is fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary for shareholders to 
assess the Group’s position and performance, business 
model and strategy; or  

— the section of the annual report describing the work of 
the Audit Committee does not appropriately address 
matters communicated by us to the Audit Committee

We are required to report to you if the Corporate 
Governance Statement does not properly disclose a 
departure from the eleven provisions of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code specified by the Listing Rules for our 
review.  

We have nothing to report in these respects.  

6. We have nothing to report on the other matters on

which we are required to report by exception

Under the Companies Act 2006, we are required to report
to you if, in our opinion:

— adequate accounting records have not been kept by the
parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have 
not been received from branches not visited by us; or  

— the parent Company financial statements and the part 

of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited 
are not in agreement with the accounting records and 
returns; or  

— certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified 

by law are not made; or  

— we have not received all the information and 
explanations we require for our audit.  

We have nothing to report in these respects. 

68

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

Irregularities – ability to detect

8.  The purpose of our audit work and to whom we owe 

our responsibilities 

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a 
body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006.  Our audit work has been undertaken 
so that we might state to the Company’s members those 
matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s 
report and for no other purpose.  To the fullest extent 
permitted by law, we do not accept or assume 
responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the 
Company’s members, as a body, for our audit work, for this 
report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

Simon Haydn-Jones (Senior Statutory Auditor)

for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor 
Chartered Accountants
66 Queen Square
Bristol
BS1 4BE

16 May 2019

We identified areas of laws and regulations that could 
reasonably be expected to have a material effect on the 
financial statements from our general commercial and 
sector experience, and through discussion with the 
Directors and other management (as required by auditing 
standards), and discussed with the directors and other 
management the policies and procedures regarding 
compliance with laws and regulations.  We communicated 
identified laws and regulations throughout our team and 
remained alert to any indications of non-compliance 
throughout the audit. This included communication from the 
group to component audit teams of relevant laws and 
regulations identified at group level.

The potential effect of these laws and regulations on the 
financial statements varies considerably.

Firstly, the group is subject to laws and regulations that 
directly affect the financial statements including financial 
reporting legislation (including related companies 
legislation), distributable profits legislation and taxation 
legislation and we assessed the extent of compliance with 
these laws and regulations as part of our procedures on the 
related financial statement items.  

Secondly, the group is subject to many other laws and 
regulations where the consequences of non-compliance 
could have a material effect on amounts or disclosures in 
the financial statements, for instance through the 
imposition of fines or litigation. We identified the following 
areas as those most likely to have such an effect: health 
and safety, anti-bribery, and employment law, recognising 
the nature of the group’s activities.  Auditing standards limit 
the required audit procedures to identify non-compliance 
with these laws and regulations to enquiry of the directors 
and other management and inspection of regulatory and 
legal correspondence, if any. These limited procedures did 
not identify actual or suspected non-compliance. 

Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit, there is an 
unavoidable risk that we may not have detected some 
material misstatements in the financial statements, even 
though we have properly planned and performed our audit 
in accordance with auditing standards. For example, the 
further removed non-compliance with laws and regulations 
(irregularities) is from the events and transactions reflected 
in the financial statements, the less likely the inherently 
limited procedures required by auditing standards would 
identify it.  In addition, as with any audit, there remained a 
higher risk of non-detection of irregularities, as these may 
involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, 
misrepresentations, or the override of internal controls. We 
are not responsible for preventing non-compliance and 
cannot be expected to detect non-compliance with all laws 
and regulations.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

69

Accounts

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

Revenue 
Underlying operating profit 
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
Exceptional items
Operating profit
Financing income
Financing cost
Net financing costs
Profit before tax
Income tax expense
Profit attributable to equity shareholders of Wincanton plc

Earnings per share
– basic
– diluted

Note 
2
3
10
4
4
6
6
6

7

8
8

2019 
£m 
1,141.5
55.3
–
(0.7)
54.6
0.1
(6.1)
(6.0)
48.6
(5.8)
42.8

2018 
£m
1,171.9
52.9
(2.3)
(6.2)
44.4
–
(6.5)
(6.5)
37.9
(6.7)
31.2

34.5p
34.2p

25.2p
24.8p

70

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)
Items which will not subsequently be reclassified to the income statement
Remeasurements of defined benefit liability
Income tax relating to items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss

Items which are or may subsequently be reclassified to the income statement
Effective portion of changes in fair value of cash flow hedges 
Net change in fair value of cash flow hedges transferred to the income statement

Other comprehensive income for the year, net of income tax 
Total comprehensive income attributable to equity shareholders of Wincanton plc

Note

25
7

2019 
£m
42.8

20.3
(3.5)
16.8

0.1
–
0.1
16.9
59.7

2018 
£m
31.2

13.8
(2.4)
11.4

(0.1)
0.1
–
11.4
42.6

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

71

Accounts

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

AT 31 MARCH 2019

Non-current assets
Goodwill and intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Investments, including those equity accounted
Deferred tax assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Assets classified as held for sale
Cash and cash equivalents

Current liabilities
Income tax payable
Trade and other payables
Provisions

Net current liabilities
Total assets less current liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Borrowings and other financial liabilities 
Employee benefits
Provisions

Net liabilities

Equity
Issued share capital
Share premium
Merger reserve
Hedging reserve
Translation reserve
Retained earnings
Total equity deficit

Note

2019  
£m

2018  
£m

10
11
13
14

15
16
17
18

20
21

19
25
21

84.0
34.5
0.2
4.2
122.9

3.7
137.7
2.4
12.7
156.5

(6.1)
(260.8)
(10.1)
(277.0)
(120.5)
2.4

(32.0)
(7.1)
(30.4)
(69.5)
(67.1)

12.5
12.9
3.5
–
(0.3)
(95.7)
(67.1)

82.7
41.7
0.1
11.5
136.0

4.4
140.7
6.1
17.6
168.8

(5.7)
(264.1)
(17.8)
(287.6)
(118.8)
17.2

(47.1)
(49.5)
(33.1)
(129.7)
(112.5)

12.5
12.9
3.5
(0.1)
(0.3)
(141.0)
(112.5)

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 15 May 2019 and were signed on their behalf by:

A Colman 
Chief Executive Officer 

T Lawlor
Chief Financial Officer

72

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

Retained earnings

Share 
premium 
£m
12.9

Merger 
reserve 
£m
3.5

Hedging 
reserve 
£m
(0.1)

Translation 
reserve 
£m
(0.3)

Own 
shares 
£m
(0.5)

Profit and 
loss 
£m
(167.3)

Balance at 1 April 2017

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income
Total comprehensive income
Share based payment transactions
Current tax on share based payment transactions
Own shares acquired
Shares issued
Dividends paid to shareholders
Balance at 31 March 2018

Issued 
share 
capital 
£m
12.4

–
–
–
–
–
–
0.1
–
12.5

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
12.9

Balance at 1 April 2018

12.5

12.9

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income
Total comprehensive income
Share based payment transactions
Current tax on share based payment transactions
Own shares acquired
Dividends paid to shareholders
Balance at 31 March 2019

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
12.5

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
12.9

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
3.5

3.5

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
3.5

Total 
equity 
deficit 
£m
(139.4)

31.2
11.4
42.6
(2.1)
0.1
(2.1)
–
(11.6)
(112.5)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(0.1)

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(0.3)

–
–
–
0.7
–
(2.1)
(0.1)
–
(2.0)

31.2
11.4
42.6
(2.8)
0.1
–
–
(11.6)
(139.0)

(0.1)

(0.3)

(2.0)

(139.0)

(112.5)

–
0.1
0.1
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(0.3)

–
–
–
1.3
–
(1.5)
–
(2.2)

42.8
16.8
59.6
(1.5)
0.1
–
(12.7)
(93.5)

42.8
16.9
59.7
(0.2)
0.1
(1.5)
(12.7)
(67.1)

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

73

Accounts

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

Operating activities
Profit before tax
Adjustments for
– depreciation and amortisation 
– interest expense
– profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment
– share based payment transactions

Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables
Decrease/(increase) in inventories
Decrease in trade and other payables
(Decrease)/increase in provisions
Increase/(decrease) in employee benefits before pension deficit payment
Income taxes paid
Cash generated before pension deficit payment
Pension deficit payment
Cash flows from operating activities

Investing activities
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
Proceeds from sale of computer software
Interest received
Trade investment
Additions of property, plant and equipment
Additions of computer software
Cash flows from investing activities

Financing activities
Own shares acquired
Borrowings repaid
(Decrease)/increase in borrowings
Equity dividends paid
Interest paid
Cash flows from financing activities

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year
Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year

Represented by:
– cash at bank and in hand
– restricted cash, being deposits held by the Group’s insurance subsidiary

74

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

2019 
£m

48.6

11.4
6.0
(6.0)
(0.2)
59.8
3.0
0.7
(2.9)
(11.2)
9.2
(1.5)
57.1
(32.3)
24.8

13.8
–
0.1
(0.1)
(6.4)
(3.3)
4.1

(1.8)
–
(15.0)
(12.7)
(4.3)
(33.8)

(4.9)
17.6
12.7

7.9
4.8
12.7

2018 
£m

37.9

14.2
6.5
–
(2.1)
56.5
(7.2)
(0.4)
(1.6)
0.2
(2.6)
(4.0)
40.9
(14.6)
26.3

0.4
0.1
–
–
(14.5)
–
(14.0)

(1.8)
(25.0)
6.9
(11.6)
(4.1)
(35.6)

(23.3)
40.9
17.6

11.7
5.9
17.6

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES

Statement of compliance
Wincanton plc (the Company) is a company incorporated, domiciled 
and registered in England and Wales. The Company is a public company 
limited by shares. The address of the Company’s registered office and its 
registered number are shown on page 112. The consolidated financial 
statements include those of the Company and its subsidiaries (together 
referred to as the Group) and the Group’s jointly controlled entities.

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared and 
approved by the Directors in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRS) and International Financial Reporting 
Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) interpretations, as adopted by the 
International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and by the European 
Union (EU) and with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable 
to companies reporting under IFRS (Adopted IFRS).

Standards, amendments and interpretations effective 
or adopted in the year
The following standards became effective in the year and have had 
an impact on the consolidated financial statements:

 • IFRS 9 Financial Instruments; and

 • IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers

The impact of adoption of these standards and the key changes to the 
accounting policies are disclosed below and in Note 29.

The following standards and amendments became effective in 
the year but did not have a material impact on the consolidated 
financial statements:

 • IFRIC 22 Foreign Currency Transactions and Advance Consideration;

 • Amendments to IFRS 2 Classification and Measurement of Share-based 

Payment Transactions; and

 • Annual Improvements 2014-2016 Cycle

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments was issued by the IASB in July 2014 and 
became effective for the Group for the year ended 31 March 2019. 
Applying IFRS 9 has resulted in changes to the measurement and 
disclosure of financial instruments and introduced a new expected 
loss impairment model. The adoption of the standard has not had 
a significant impact on the Group’s consolidated results or financial 
position. The Group has applied the standard retrospectively and in 
accordance with the transition provisions has elected not to restate 
comparative figures. See Note 29 for further details.

IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers was issued by the 
IASB in May 2014 and became effective for the Group for the year 
ended 31 March 2019. The Group has applied the cumulative catch-up 
approach, therefore comparative periods have not been restated, and 
are presented as previously reported, under IAS 18.

IFRS 15 introduces a five-step model for recognising revenue, with 
revenue being recognised when the customer obtains control of 
the goods and services transferred by the Group and the related 
performance obligations have been satisfied. The amount recognised 
reflects the amount of consideration that the Group expects to be 
entitled to in exchange for those goods and services.

The effects of implementing IFRS 15 include changes in the timing of 
revenue recognition on certain contracts for: costs to fulfil a contract; 
deferred management fees; and revenue linked to performance 
measures such as Key Performance Indicators and gain-share 
mechanisms. IFRS 15 also addresses the treatment of costs of obtaining 
a contract. The implementation of the standard did not have a material 
effect on the Group’s financial statements as at 31 March 2018, therefore 
no transition adjustment was made. The effect on the Group’s results for 
the year ended 31 March 2019 compared to those that would have been 
reported under IAS 18 are shown in Note 29 to the financial statements. 

Standards and amendments that are issued but not yet 
applied by the Group
At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, the following 
Standards and Interpretations, which have not been applied in these 
financial statements, were in issue but are either not yet effective or 
have not yet been adopted by the EU:

 • IFRS 16 Leases

 • IFRS 17 Insurance Contracts

 • IFRIC 23 Uncertainty over Tax Treatments

 • Amendments to IFRS 9 – Prepayment Features with 

Negative Compensation

 • Amendments to IAS 19: Plan Amendment, Curtailment or Settlement

 • Amendments to IAS 28: Long-term Interests in Associates and 

Joint Ventures 

 • Annual Improvements to IFRS Standards 2015-2017 Cycle

IFRS 16 Leases was issued by the IASB in January 2016 and becomes 
effective for the Group for the year ended 31 March 2020. IFRS 16 sets 
out the principles for the recognition, measurement, presentation 
and disclosure of leases for both lessees and lessors. For lessees the 
distinction between operating leases and finance leases has been 
removed and replaced by a single lease accounting model. Under this 
model lessees recognise a right-of-use asset, representing the right to 
use the underlying asset, and a corresponding lease liability, representing 
the obligation to make lease payments for all leases except where the 
lease term is 12 months or less or the underlying assets is of a low value. 
In the Income statement operating lease rentals will be replaced with the 
amortisation of the right-of-use asset and lease finance costs.

The Group intends to apply IFRS 16 on 1 April 2019 using the modified 
retrospective approach; the cumulative effect of initial adoption being 
recognised as an adjustment to the opening balance of retained 
earnings as at 1 April 2019 with no restatement of comparative 
information. The lease liabilities on transition will be the present value 
of lease payments discounted using the incremental borrowing rate at 
1 April 2019. The right-of-use asset will be valued at an amount equal to 
either the lease liability or the carrying amount as if IFRS 16 had been 
applied since the start of the lease, but using the discount rate at 1 April 
2019 (the date of initial application), determined on a lease by lease basis.

The Group plans to take advantage of practical expedients to:

 • apply IFRS 16 only to contracts previously identified as leases under IAS 
17 Leases and IFRIC 14 Determining whether an Arrangement contains 
a Lease;

 • exclude leases where the lease term is 12 months or less from the date 

of initial application and class such leases as short term leases;

 • exclude low value assets; 

 • exclude initial direct costs from the measurement of the right-of-use 

asset at the date of initial application;

 • use hindsight, such as in determining the lease term if the contract 

contains options to extend or terminate; 

 • apply a single discount rate to a portfolio of leases with similar 

characteristics; and

 • rely on its assessment as to whether a lease is onerous by applying IAS 
37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets immediately 
before the date of initial application as an alternative to performing an 
impairment review.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

75

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

At 31 March 2019 the Group’s future minimum lease payments 
under non-cancellable operating leases amounted to £201.8m on 
an undiscounted basis. Of these commitments £8.0m relates to 
short term leases and leases of low value assets which will continue 
to be recognised on a straight line basis as an expense in the 
income statement.

The Group expects to recognise right-of-use assets of approximately 
£130m and lease liabilities of approximately £150m on 1 April 2019, 
together with a deferred tax asset of £2m. There is no cash impact of 
adopting IFRS 16, with the repayment of the principal portion of the 
lease liability being classified as financing instead of operating cash flows.

The final impact of IFRS 16 in the period of initial application will depend 
on a number of factors including new leases agreed in the period, the 
estimated lease term, extensions and termination agreements and 
economic conditions. In addition, the Group will continue to work to 
refine procedures to apply the requirements of IFRS 16 and finalise 
accounting policy choices. As a result of this ongoing work, it is possible 
that there may be changes to the impact shown above.

The covenant requirements for the Group’s committed financing 
facilities are based on “Frozen GAAP” and therefore are not impacted 
by the transition to IFRS 16. 

Basis of preparation
The Group and Company financial statements are presented in pounds 
sterling, rounded to the nearest hundred thousand. They are prepared 
on the historical cost basis except where assets or liabilities are required 
to be stated at their fair value.

The accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently 
to all periods presented in these Group financial statements with 
the exception of the amendments set out on page 75. The impact 
of the adoption of these amendments is set out in Note 29 to the 
financial statements.

Critical accounting judgements and key sources 
of estimation uncertainty
The preparation of Group financial statements under Adopted IFRS 
and parent Company financial statements under FRS 101 Reduced 
Disclosure Framework requires management to make judgements, 
estimates and assumptions that affect the application of policies and 
the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and expenses. 
The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical 
experience and various other factors that are believed to be reasonable 
under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis of making 
the judgements about carrying values of assets and liabilities that are 
not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from 
these estimates.

The estimates and assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. 
Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in which 
the estimate is revised and/or in future periods if applicable.

Management discusses with the Audit Committee the development, 
selection, application and disclosure of the Group’s critical accounting 
policies and estimates.

Critical judgements in applying the Group’s accounting policies
The following are key judgements that the Directors have made in 
the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies and that 
have the most significant effect on the amounts recognised in the 
financial statements:

 • the presentation of selected items as exceptional.

 • the use of underlying measures of operating profit, profit before tax, 

profit after tax and earnings per share.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The Group’s key sources of estimation uncertainty in the reporting 
period that have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to 
the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial 
year are shown below:

Defined benefit pension arrangements
Details of the Group’s defined benefit arrangements are set out in 
Note 25 to the financial statements, including the assumptions made, 
risk factors and tables showing the sensitivity of the pension scheme 
obligations to changes in actuarial assumptions. The effects of changes 
in the actuarial and demographic assumptions underlying the Scheme’s 
obligations, together with experience gains or losses and the return on 
assets excluding amounts recognised in net financing costs are classified 
as remeasurements in the defined benefit liability.

Provisions
Provisions are liabilities of uncertain timing or amount and therefore 
judgement is applied in making a reliable estimate of the quantum and 
timing. Further information about the assumptions and risk factors is 
given in Note 21.

Going concern
The Group has net liabilities of £67.1m (2018: £112.5m) primarily as a result 
of previous retained losses. The reduction in the year principally relates 
to the profit for the year and the reduced pension deficit offset by 
dividend payments.

The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect 
its future development, performance and position are set out on pages 
10 to 17 and 26 to 29 which also contain a review of the financial position 
of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position, banking covenants and 
borrowing facilities. In addition, Note 27 to the financial statements 
includes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing: 
its capital; its financial risk management objectives; details of its financial 
instruments and hedging activities; and its exposures to credit risk and 
liquidity risk.

The Group’s committed facilities at 31 March 2019 comprise the 
syndicated main bank facility of £141.2m. This facility was successfully 
amended during the year, extending the term by an additional two years 
to October 2023 and removing the mandatory prepayments of £8.8m 
previously due in October 2019 and October 2020. 

As part of the year-end process the Directors have undertaken a going 
concern review, as required by IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements. 
This includes a review of the headroom available when the Group’s 
facilities are compared to the forecast monthly cash flows for the next 
two financial years, sensitising the borrowing covenants to give an 
indication of the headroom therein, and consideration of the assessment 
undertaken for the purposes of providing the Viability statement on 
page 31. Having undertaken this review, the Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Company and the Group overall have adequate 
resources to continue to meet their obligations as they fall due and 
satisfy their borrowing covenants for at least the next twelve months and 
for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, these financial statements have 
been prepared on a going concern basis.

Basis of consolidation
The consolidated Group financial statements include the financial 
statements of the Company and its subsidiary undertakings made up 
to the balance sheet date. When the Company acquired the Wincanton 
group of companies upon demerger from the former parent in May 
2001, the changes in Group structure were accounted for using the 
principles of merger accounting available under UK GAAP at the time. 
Businesses acquired or disposed of since then have been accounted 
for using acquisition accounting principles from or up to the date that 
control passed.

76

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Subsidiaries are those entities controlled by the Group. Control is 
achieved when the Company has power over the investee; is exposed 
to, or has rights to, variable return from its involvement with the 
investee; and has the ability to use its power to affect its returns. 
The Company reassesses whether or not it controls an investee if facts 
and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more 
of the three elements of control listed above. In assessing control, 
potential voting rights that presently are exercisable or convertible 
are taken into account. The financial statements of subsidiaries are 
included in the consolidated financial statements from or up to the 
date that control passed.

The results, assets and liabilities of jointly controlled entities are 
incorporated in these financial statements using the equity method 
of accounting, in accordance with IFRS 11 Joint Arrangements and 
IAS 28 Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures. Under the 
equity method, a jointly controlled entity is initially recognised in the 
consolidated statement of financial position at cost and adjusted 
thereafter to recognise the Group’s share of the profit or loss and other 
comprehensive income of the jointly controlled entity. Intra-group 
balances, and any unrealised gains and losses or income and expenses 
arising from intra-group transactions, are eliminated in preparing 
the consolidated financial statements. Unrealised gains arising from 
transactions with jointly controlled entities are eliminated to the extent 
of the Group’s interest in the entity. Unrealised losses are eliminated in 
the same way as unrealised gains, but only to the extent that there is 
no evidence of impairment.

Intangible assets
Goodwill
All business combinations are accounted for by applying the acquisition 
method. Goodwill represents amounts arising on acquisition of 
subsidiaries and jointly controlled entities.

Goodwill is stated at cost less any impairment losses. Goodwill is 
allocated to groups of cash-generating units and is tested annually 
for impairment.

Other intangible assets
Intangible assets arising under a business combination (acquired 
intangible assets) are capitalised at fair value as determined at the date of 
acquisition and are stated at that fair value less accumulated amortisation 
and impairment losses.

Amortisation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis 
over the estimated useful lives of acquired intangible assets from the 
date they are acquired as follows:

Customer relationships

6 to 10 years

The cost of computer software purchased or developed in-house which 
has the capacity to generate economic benefits for a period in excess 
of one year is capitalised as an intangible asset. Amortisation is charged 
to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the following 
estimated useful lives:

Computer software costs

3 to 5 years

Major software projects may be amortised over lives of up to ten years.

Property, plant and equipment
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at cost or deemed 
cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. The cost of 
tangible assets includes directly attributable costs, including appropriate 
commissioning costs.

Subsequent expenditure
The Group recognises in the carrying amount of an item of property, 
plant and equipment the costs incurred in replacing part of such an 
item if it is probable that the future economic benefits will flow to the 
Group and when the cost can be measured reliably. All other such 
costs, including the derecognition of the replaced part of the item, 
are expensed in the income statement as incurred.

Depreciation
Depreciation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis 
over the estimated useful life of each part of an item of property, plant 
and equipment. The estimated useful lives are as follows:

Freehold and long leasehold buildings
Short leasehold improvements
Plant and equipment, furniture and fittings
Office machinery and computers
Motor vehicles

50 years
life of lease
5 to 25 years
3 to 5 years 
5 to 10 years

The range of useful economic lives given reflects the fact that assets held 
for specific contracts are depreciated over the lives of those contracts. 
Freehold land is not depreciated. The residual value of tangible assets, 
if significant, is reassessed annually.

Assets held for sale
Non-current assets are classified as held for sale if their carrying amount 
will be recovered through a sale transaction rather than through 
continuing use. This condition is met only when: the sale is highly 
probable; the asset is available for immediate sale in its present condition; 
and management are committed to the sale which is expected to 
complete within one year from the date of classification. Assets held for 
sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less 
costs to sell.

Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is 
based on the first-in first-out principle and includes expenditure incurred 
in acquiring the inventories and bringing them to their existing location 
and condition. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the 
ordinary course of business, less selling expenses.

Trade and other receivables
Trade and other receivables are stated at their fair value on initial 
recognition (discounted if material) and subsequently at amortised cost, 
i.e. less any impairment losses.

Receivables that have been sold in accordance with a non-recourse trade 
receivable financing agreement are derecognised at the date sold.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances, restricted cash 
and call deposits.

Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are stated at their fair value on initial 
recognition (discounted if material) and subsequently at amortised cost.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

77

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Foreign currency
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated at the foreign exchange 
rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities 
denominated in foreign currencies at the balance sheet date are 
translated into sterling at the foreign exchange rate ruling at that date. 

Foreign exchange differences arising on such translation are recognised 
in the income statement.

The assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair 
value adjustments arising on consolidation, are translated into sterling at 
the foreign exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. The revenues 
and expenses of foreign operations are translated into sterling at rates 
approximating the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates of the 
transactions. Foreign exchange differences arising on translation are 
recognised directly in a separate component of other comprehensive 
income. They are released into the income statement upon disposal.

Employee benefits
The Group operates both defined contribution and defined benefit 
pension arrangements. The assets of these arrangements are held 
in separate Trustee administered funds independent of the Group. 
The investment strategy of the Trustee and Group is to maximise 
investment returns, with a key area for management attention being 
to seek to meet the Group’s funded defined benefit obligations. 
In accordance with this strategy certain investments are designated at 
fair value and are accounted for as set out below. The defined benefit 
arrangements closed to future accrual with effect from 31 March 2014.

Defined contribution arrangements
Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension 
arrangements are recognised as an expense in the income statement 
as incurred.

Defined benefit arrangements
The Group’s net obligation in respect of defined benefit pension 
arrangements is calculated separately for each plan by estimating the 
amount of future benefit that employees have earned in return for 
their service in prior periods; that benefit is discounted to determine 
the present value, and the fair value of any scheme assets is deducted. 
The discount rate is the yield at the balance sheet date on AA credit rated 
bonds that have maturity dates approximating the terms of the Group’s 
obligations. The calculation is performed by a qualified actuary using the 
projected unit method.

Where the calculation results in an asset to the Group, this is limited to 
the present value of any future refunds from the scheme or reductions 
in future contributions to the scheme.

Past service costs arising due to plan amendments or curtailments 
are recognised in the income statement immediately.

Remeasurement gains and losses that arise in calculating the Group’s 
obligation in respect of a scheme are recognised in full through other 
comprehensive income in the statement of comprehensive income.

Share based payment transactions
The Group has applied the requirements of IFRS 2 Share based Payments 
to the grants of options made under the Special Option Plan and Long 
Term Incentive Plan.

The Group issues options under equity-settled share based incentive 
schemes to certain employees which are measured at the date of grant 
as the fair value of the employee services required in exchange for the 
grant. The fair value determined is expensed on a straight-line basis 
over the vesting period, based on the Group’s estimate of shares that 
will eventually vest and adjusted for the effect of non-market based 
vesting conditions.

Fair value is measured by an external valuer using the Binomial, Monte-
Carlo or scenario-modelling methods as appropriate. The expected 
life assumptions used in the models have been adjusted, based on 
management’s best estimate, for the effects of non-transferability, 
exercise restrictions and behavioural considerations.

A number of shares in the Company are held in trust on behalf of 
employees who hold options under the Group’s equity-settled share 
based incentive schemes. Such shares are held by an employee benefit 
trust and are treated as treasury shares and shown in the balance sheet 
as a deduction from equity.

Other share schemes
Shares awarded on a matching basis to employees participating in 
the Company’s Share Incentive Plan are purchased at the prevailing 
market rate and charged to the income statement each period as 
employees make an eligible contribution. The shares purchased are 
held in a separately administered offshore trust for the benefit of the 
Plan participants.

Provisions
A provision is recognised in the balance sheet when the Group has a 
present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event and 
it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to 
settle the obligation. If the effect is material, provisions are determined 
by discounting the expected future cash flows.

The Group provides for onerous property provisions on a site 
by site basis due to the unique nature and location of each site. 
Provision is made for the best estimate of the expected cost of empty 
and under-utilised properties, including dilapidations where applicable. 
Dilapidations are provided for specific individual properties where the 
outflow of resources is probable and the amount of the obligation can 
be reliably estimated. Where significant, amounts are discounted.

The Group provides for insurance claims on an appropriate discounted 
basis depending on the expected timing of their settlement. Provision is 
made for the estimated costs of claims arising from past events based on 
the advice of the Group’s external insurance advisers.

Other provisions include those for restructuring, onerous contracts, 
sundry claims and settlements. A restructuring provision is recognised 
only when a constructive obligation exists, with the amount recognised 
based on the estimated liability. An onerous contract provision is 
recognised when the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations 
under the contract exceed the economic benefits expected to be 
received. Unavoidable costs are only those costs that are incremental in 
fulfilling the contract and exclude depreciation and central recharges.

78

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

Impairment
The carrying amounts of the Group’s assets, other than inventories and 
deferred tax assets, are reviewed at each balance sheet date to determine 
whether there is any indication of impairment. The two exceptions 
above are dealt with as per the separate applicable accounting policy. 
An asset is considered for impairment testing if objective evidence 
indicates that one or more events had a negative effect on the estimated 
future cash flows of the asset. If any such indication exists, the asset’s 
recoverable amount is estimated. In addition, Goodwill is tested for 
impairment at least annually.

The Group applies the simplified approach permitted by IFRS 9, which 
requires the application of a lifetime expected loss provision to all 
receivables, including contract receivables. The provision calculations are 
based on historic credit losses applied to older balances. This approach 
is followed for all receivables unless there are specific circumstances 
which would render the receivable irrecoverable and therefore require 
a specific provision. A provision is made against trade receivables and 
contract receivables until such time as the Group believes the amount to 
be irrecoverable, after which the trade receivable or contract receivables 
balance is written off.

A cash-generating unit is the smallest identifiable group of assets that 
generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows 
from other assets or groups of assets. An impairment loss is recognised 
whenever the carrying amount of an asset or cash-generating unit 
exceeds its recoverable amount. Impairment losses are recognised 
in the income statement. Impairment losses recognised in respect 
of cash-generating units are allocated first to reduce the amount of 
goodwill allocated to the applicable cash-generating unit and then 
to reduce the carrying amount of the other assets in the unit on a 
pro rata basis.

Calculation of recoverable amount
The recoverable amount of the Group’s receivables carried at amortised 
cost is calculated as the present value of expected future cash flows, 
discounted at the original effective interest rate inherent in the asset. 
Receivables with a short duration are not discounted.

The recoverable amount of other assets is the greater of their fair value 
less costs to sell and value in use. In assessing value in use, the estimated 
future cash flows are discounted to their present value. For an asset that 
does not generate largely independent cash inflows, the recoverable 
amount is determined for the cash generating unit or group of cash 
generating units, to which the asset belongs.

Reversals of impairment
An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed. An impairment 
loss in respect of a receivable carried at amortised cost is reversed only 
to the extent that the carrying amount does not exceed the carrying 
amount that would have been determined if no impairment loss had 
been recognised and if the reversal can be related objectively to an event 
occurring after the impairment was recognised.

In respect of other assets, an impairment loss is reversed if there has been 
a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount.

Revenue recognition
The Group has applied IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers 
using the cumulative effect method. Comparative information in both 
the Income Statement and the Balance Sheet has not been restated and 
continues to be reported under IAS 18 Revenue.

The Group recognises revenue from contracts with customers as 
the performance obligations to deliver products and services under 
these contracts are satisfied. The Group’s contracts are typically for the 
provision of transport or warehouse services and normally comprise 
a single performance obligation being a series of goods or services 
satisfied over time.

Revenue is recognised based on the amount of consideration 
expected to be received in exchange for satisfying the performance 
obligations. The main elements of consideration identified are fixed 
management fees and variable consideration less rebates to customers. 
Variable consideration includes pass through costs on open book 
contracts, rate card revenue and KPI and gain share mechanisms. 
KPI revenue or penalties are recognised on certain contracts when 
the performance of those contracts meets or falls short of the targets 
set. Gain share revenue is recognised on certain contracts when the 
impact of any cost saving initiatives has been agreed with the customer. 
Variable revenue is recognised only to the extent that it is highly probable 
that a significant reversal of the cumulative revenue recognised will not 
take place.

Revenue is usually recognised over time, as the customer will 
simultaneously receive and consume the goods and services provided. 
Further details are provided in Note 2 to the financial statements.

The Group does not expect to have any contracts which include a 
significant financing arrangement and therefore does not adjust its 
transaction price for the time value of money.

Where payments are received in advance of revenue being recognised 
they are included as contract liabilities. Where revenue is recognised in 
advance of amounts being invoiced, it is reported as a contract receivable. 

Where a modification to an existing contract occurs, the Group assesses 
the nature of the modification and whether it represents a separate 
performance obligation required to be satisfied by the Group or whether 
it is a modification to the existing performance obligation. 

Expenses
Lease payments
Payments made under operating leases are recognised in the 
income statement on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. 
Lease incentives received are recognised in the income statement 
as an integral part of the total lease expense.

Net financing costs
Net financing costs comprise interest payable and other charges 
less interest income.

Interest payable on borrowings is calculated using the effective interest 
rate method. Other charges include bank fees, amortisation of bank 
arrangement fees, unwinding of discounts, and losses on hedging 
instruments that are recognised in the income statement (see hedge 
accounting policy below).

Interest income includes interest receivable on funds invested and 
gains on hedging instruments, and these are recognised in the income 
statement as they accrue.

Net financing costs include the interest on the net defined benefit 
pension liability.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

79

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

Taxation
Tax on profits or losses for the year comprises current and deferred tax 
and is recognised in the income statement except to the extent that it 
relates to items recognised in other comprehensive income or directly 
in equity, in which case it is recognised in the relevant component.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for 
the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the 
balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect 
of previous years.

Deferred tax is provided using the balance sheet liability method, 
providing for temporary differences between the carrying amounts 
of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts 
used for taxation purposes. The following temporary differences are not 
provided for: the initial recognition of goodwill and the initial recognition 
of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor taxable profit. 
The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected 
manner of realisation or settlement of the carrying amount of assets 
and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the 
balance sheet date.

A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable 
that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset can be 
utilised. Deferred tax assets are reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that the related tax benefit will be realised.

Operating segments
Operating segments are identified on the basis of information that 
is provided to the Executive Management Team (EMT), which is the 
Group’s chief operating decision-maker, to allocate capital and resources 
and to assess performance.

Derivative financial instruments and hedge accounting
The Group uses derivative financial instruments to hedge its exposure 
to foreign exchange and interest rate risks arising from operational, 
financing and investment activities. In accordance with its treasury policy, 
the Group does not hold or issue derivative financial instruments for 
trading purposes. However, derivatives that do not qualify for hedge 
accounting are accounted for as trading instruments.

Derivative financial instruments which are accounted for as trading 
instruments are recognised initially and subsequently stated at fair 
value. The gain or loss on remeasurement to fair value is recognised 
immediately in the income statement. However, where derivatives 
qualify for hedge accounting, recognition of any resultant gain or loss 
depends on the nature of the item being hedged.

The fair value of interest rate swaps is determined by discounting 
the future cash flows at rates determined by year-end yield curves.

The fair value of forward exchange contracts is their quoted market 
price at the balance sheet date, being the present value of the quoted 
forward price.

Upon initial recognition attributable transaction costs are recognised 
in the income statement when incurred.

Cash flow hedges
Where a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the 
variability in cash flows of a highly probable forecast transaction, the 
effective part of any gain or loss on the derivative financial instrument 
is recognised directly in equity within hedging reserves. The ineffective 
part of any gain or loss is recognised immediately within operating 
profit, or within net financing costs in the case of interest rate swaps 
designated as cash flow hedges. When the forecast transaction that was 
being hedged is realised and affects profit or loss, the cumulative gain 
or loss on the derivative financial instrument is removed from equity 
and recognised in the income statement in the same period. When the 
forecast transaction subsequently results in the recognition of a non-
financial asset or non-financial liability, the associated cumulative gain 
or loss is removed from equity and included in the initial cost or other 
carrying amount of the non-financial asset or non-financial liability.

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised, or 
the entity revokes designation of the hedge relationship but the hedged 
forecast transaction is still expected to occur, the cumulative gain or 
loss at that point remains in equity and is recognised in accordance 
with the above policy when the transaction takes place. If the hedged 
transaction is no longer expected to take place, the cumulative gain 
or loss is removed from equity and recognised immediately in the 
income statement.

Hedge of monetary assets and liabilities
Where a derivative financial instrument is used to economically hedge 
the foreign exchange exposure of a recognised monetary asset or 
liability, no hedge accounting is applied and any gain or loss on the 
hedging instrument is recognised in the income statement.

Interest-bearing borrowings
Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, 
less attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, 
interest-bearing borrowings are stated at amortised cost with any 
difference between cost and redemption value being recognised 
in the income statement over the period of the borrowings on 
an effective interest basis. Interest-bearing borrowings which are 
designated hedged items in a fair value hedge arrangement are 
carried at fair value (see policy above).

Dividends 
Dividends are recognised in the period in which they are declared 
and approved, or paid.

Exceptional items 
Exceptional items are those items of income or expenditure which, 
due to their nature or size, the Directors consider should be disclosed 
separately on the face of the income statement. The Directors present 
the results of the business on an underlying basis, as they believe this 
better represents the performance of the business.

Alternative Performance Measures (APMs)
Underlying results are used in the day-to-day management of the Group. 
They represent statutory measures adjusted for items which could distort 
the understanding of performance and comparability year on year, 
namely the amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional items, 
related tax and exceptional tax items where relevant. Page 29 provides 
a reconciliation between APMs and statutory IFRS measures.

80

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

2. CONTRACT REVENUE AND COSTS

The Group has applied IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers with effect from 1 April 2018, using the cumulative effect method. 
Comparative information has not been restated and continues to be reported under IAS 18. The following practical expedients have been applied:

 • where we have a right to invoice the customer at an amount that corresponds directly with performance to date, for example according to an 

agreed rate-card, revenue is recognised at that amount; and

 • incremental costs of obtaining a contract have not been capitalised where the amortisation period for the asset is one year or less.

The implementation of the standard did not have a material effect on the Group’s financial statements as at 1 April 2018, therefore no transition 
adjustment was made. 

The effect of initially applying IFRS 15 on the Group’s revenue from contracts with customers was not significant with increases in revenue on some 
contracts being offset by a reduction in others. The effect on the Group’s results in the year ended 31 March 2019 compared to those that would have 
been reported under IAS 18 are shown in Note 29 to the consolidated financial statements. Reclassifications have been made within current assets, to 
present contract receivables and contract fulfilment assets separately from trade and other receivables and within current liabilities to present contract 
liabilities separately from trade and other payables.

CONTRACT REVENUE
Customer contracts are disaggregated into their component performance obligations, typically transport services and warehouse services, 
with revenue generally being recognised over time. Further detail is given in the table below:

Area
Fixed/variable 
management fee

Explanation
Open book contracts 
will typically cover 
costs plus an agreed 
management fee.

Rate-card revenue

Performance-related 
revenue

Payments to 
customers

In closed book contracts, 
revenue is typically 
recognised based on 
a pre-agreed rate-card.
Revenue linked to 
performance measures, 
such as Key Performance 
Indicators (KPIs) and gain-
share mechanisms.
Transition payments 
made to the customer, 
or payments in relation 
to KPI performance.

Nature, timing and satisfaction of performance obligations 
Fixed management fees are recognised over the contract term. Variable management 
fees (a fixed percentage of costs) are recognised as the corresponding costs are 
incurred. Where the Group has the right to invoice the customer at an amount that 
corresponds directly with performance to date, the practical expedient is applied to 
recognise revenue at that amount. Where the Group does not have the right to invoice 
the customer in line with performance to date, the input method is applied to measure 
progress of performance to date. Revenue relating to costs to serve the customer 
are invoiced in line with the customer receiving and consuming benefits under the 
contract, and is recognised in the period in which it is earned. 
Revenue based on a pre-agreed rate-card is recognised as services are provided. 
The Group applies the practical expedient to recognise revenue at the amount the 
Group has the right to invoice due to the customer simultaneously receiving and 
consuming benefits under the contract. 
Variable revenue is recognised to the extent performance measures have been met 
and it is highly probable a significant revenue reversal will not occur. 

Payments made to customers that are not for the provision of distinct goods or services 
are recognised as a rebate at the later of: when revenue is recognised for the related 
services; or when it is paid or promised to be paid. 

Disaggregation of revenue
Revenue is disaggregated into two distinct operating segments. This is consistent with the revenue information that is disclosed for each reportable 
segment under IFRS 8 Operating Segments, as reported in Note 3 to the financial statements.

Operating segments

Retail & Consumer
Industrial & Transport
Revenue from contracts with customers

Note

2

2019  
£m
708.9
432.6
1,141.5

2018  
£m
691.7
480.2
1,171.9

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

81

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

2. CONTRACT REVENUE AND COSTS (CONTINUED)

The split of Retail & Consumer revenue by the industry sectors is as follows:

Retail General Merchandise
Retail Grocery
Consumer Products
Retail & Consumer

Note

2019  
£m
423.8
180.8
104.3
708.9

20181 
£m
388.8
193.2
109.7
691.7

1  Comparative numbers for certain contracts within Retail General Merchandise and Retail Grocery have been realigned within the sector split in line with how management reviews the business.

The split of Industrial & Transport revenue by the industry sectors is as follows:

Transport Services
Construction
Other
Industrial & Transport

Note

2019  
£m
171.4
136.7
124.5
432.6

1  Comparative numbers for certain contracts within Transport Services and Construction have been realigned within the sector split in line with how management reviews the business.

Contract costs
The following table shows assets recognised from costs incurred to obtain contracts or fulfil contracts:

Costs to obtain contracts
Costs to fulfil contracts
Total

Note

2019 
£m
0.3
1.2
1.5

20181 
£m
210.6
150.3
119.3
480.2

2018 
£m
–
–
–

Costs to obtain contracts relate to sales bonuses paid as a result of obtaining contracts. These costs are amortised on a straight-line basis over the 
period of the contracts obtained. During the period, the amount of amortisation was £0.1m (2018: n/a). 

Costs to fulfil contracts relate to project management costs as a result of setting up and managing projects. These costs are amortised on 
a straight-line basis over the period of contract. During the period, the amount of amortisation was £0.4m (2018: n/a). In the prior year costs 
to fulfil contracts of £0.6m were included within prepayments and accrued income.

There was no impairment loss in relation to the costs capitalised.

The Group applies the practical expedient in paragraph 94 of IFRS 15 and recognises the incremental costs of obtaining a contract as an expense 
in the income statement when incurred, if the amortisation period of the asset which would otherwise have been recognised is one year or less.

82

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

 
 
Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

3. OPERATING SEGMENTS

Wincanton plc provides contract logistics services in the UK and Ireland. The Group manages its operations in two distinct operating segments; 
Retail & Consumer (including Retail General Merchandise, Retail Grocery and Consumer Products) and Industrial & Transport (including Transport 
Services, Construction and Other).

The results of the operating segments are regularly reviewed by the Executive Management Team (EMT) to allocate resources to these segments 
and to assess their performance. The Group evaluates the performance of the operating segments on the basis of revenue and underlying operating 
profit. Assets and liabilities are reviewed at a consolidated level only, therefore segmental information is not provided.

Revenue from external customers1
Underlying EBITDA2
Depreciation 
Amortisation of software intangibles
Underlying operating profit2
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
Exceptional items
Operating profit
Net financing costs
Profit before tax

Total Group assets3
Additions to reportable segment non-current assets:
– property, plant and equipment
– computer software costs
Total Group liabilities

Retail & 
Consumer  
2019 
£m
708.9
36.9
(4.5)
(1.2)
31.2

Industrial & 
Transport 
 2019 
£m
432.6
29.8
(5.0)
(0.7)
24.1

3.6
2.0

2.8
1.3

Note

11
10

4

6

11
10

Retail & 
Consumer 
 2018 
£m
691.7
36.4
(5.6)
(1.1)
29.7

Industrial & 
Transport 
2018 
£m
480.2
28.4
(4.4)
(0.8)
23.2

3.7
–

10.8
–

Total  
2019 
£m
1,141.5
66.7
(9.5)
(1.9)
55.3
–
(0.7)
54.6
(6.0)
48.6

279.4

6.4
3.3
(346.5)

Total 
2018 
£m
1,171.9
64.8
(10.0)
(1.9)
52.9
(2.3)
(6.2)
44.4
(6.5)
37.9

304.8

14.5
–
(417.3)

1  Included in segment revenue is £1,129.0m (2018: £1,160.4m) in respect of customers based in the UK.

2  Underlying EBITDA refers to underlying operating profit before depreciation and amortisation. Underlying operating profit is stated before amortisation of acquired intangibles 

and exceptional items.

3  Total Group assets include non-current assets of £122.9m (2018: £136.0m), of which £122.9m (2018: £135.9m) are held in the UK.

Revenue of £213.1m (2018: £212.5m) and £131.9m (2018: £145.7m) arose from sales to the Group’s two largest single customers, being groups of 
companies under common control, and is reported within the Retail & Consumer segment above. No other single customer or group of customers 
under common control contributed 10% or more to the Group’s revenue in either the current or prior year.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

83

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

4. OPERATING PROFIT

Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Administrative expenses
Operating profit

2019

Amortisation and
 Exceptional 
items2
£m
–
–
–
(0.7)
(0.7)

Underlying1
£m
1,141.5
(1,069.6)
71.9
(16.6)
55.3

Total 
£m
1,141.5
(1,069.6)
71.9
(17.3)
54.6

2018

Amortisation and 
Exceptional
 items2
£m
–
(5.2)
(5.2)
(3.3)
(8.5)

Underlying1
£m
1,171.9
(1,101.7)
70.2
(17.3)
52.9

Total 
£m
1,171.9
(1,106.9)
65.0
(20.6)
44.4

1  Underlying operating profit is stated before amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional items.

2  Comprises the amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional items.

The following items have been charged in arriving at operating profit:
Auditor’s remuneration:
Audit fees for statutory audit services
– parent company
– subsidiary undertakings
Non-audit fees
– fees paid to the auditor and its associates for assurance services
Depreciation and other amounts written off: property, plant and equipment
Amortisation and other amounts written off: software intangibles
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
Operating lease rentals
– plant and equipment
– land and buildings

Exceptional items

Impact of GMP equalisation
Profit on disposal of asset held for resale
Property provision movements
Restructuring costs
Pension liability management exercise

Note

2019 
£m

2018 
£m

11
10
10

0.1
0.3

0.1
9.5
1.9
–

28.8
19.8

2019 
£m
(8.2)
6.0
1.5
–
–
(0.7)

0.1
0.2

0.1
10.0
1.9
2.3

29.2
21.0

2018 
£m
–
–
–
(8.2)
2.0
(6.2)

On 26 October 2018, the High Court of Justice of England and Wales issued a judgment relating to Lloyds Banking Group requiring equality of 
treatment of historic pension benefits for men and women. We have recognised a past service cost of £8.2m as an estimate of the impact of 
equalising this benefit. We are continuing to work with the Trustee on the details of implementing this judgement. 

During the year we completed the disposal of a freehold property previously reported as an asset held for sale, receiving gross sale proceeds 
of £14.5m and incurring costs of disposal and transitioning to another site of £1.2m and £0.5m respectively. The carrying value of the property 
was £6.8m generating a net profit on disposal and transition of £6.0m.

In the year the Group has revised estimates of property provisions which had previously been set up via exceptionals. A full novation of one lease 
on favourable terms has been partly offset by an increase in the estimated costs on another.

In the prior year, the Group undertook a restructuring programme, within the Industrial & Transport sector and the Group’s support functions, 
to competitively position the business for the future. A charge of £8.2m was included as exceptional comprising primarily of the costs of exit 
of people and associated property costs.

The Group completed a pension scheme liability management exercise in conjunction with the Trustee in the prior year with the settlement gains 
and adjustment to the estimated costs of £2.0m being recognised in the prior year.

84

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

5. PERSONNEL EXPENSES, INCLUDING DIRECTORS

Wages and salaries
Share based payments (including IFRS 2 fair value charges)
Social security contributions
Contributions to defined contribution pension arrangements

Average number of persons employed by the Group (including Directors) during the year

Note

25

2019 
£m
482.5
1.0
48.5
24.6
556.6

2018 
£m
473.0
1.3
48.7
19.0
542.0

2019
17,460

2018
17,500

Directors’ emoluments

Salaries
Bonus
Other benefits
Non-executive Directors’ fees
Total emoluments

2019 
£’000
755
686
187
403
2,031

The aggregate of the amount of gains made by Adrian Colman and Tim Lawlor on the exercise of share options during the year are £198,000 
and £31,000 respectively. Full details of each individual Director’s emoluments, bonuses, share options and pension entitlements are given in 
the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 44 to 59. 

6. NET FINANCING COSTS

Recognised in the income statement

Interest income
Interest expense
Unwinding of discount on provisions
Interest on the net defined benefit pension liability

Net financing costs

Note

21
25

2019 
£m
0.1
(4.3)
(0.8)
(1.0)
(6.1)
(6.0)

2018 
£’000
743
588
186
368
1,885

2018 
£m
–
(4.1)
(0.6)
(1.8)
(6.5)
(6.5)

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

85

 
Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

7. INCOME TAX EXPENSE

Recognised in the income statement

Current tax expense
Current year
Adjustments for prior years

Deferred tax expense
Current year
Adjustments for prior years

Total income tax expense

Reconciliation of effective tax rate 
Profit before tax
Income tax using the UK corporation tax rate of 19% (2018: 19%)
Non-deductible expenditure
Non-taxable income
Exceptional items in income statement
Change in UK corporation tax rate
Effect of tax rate in foreign jurisdictions
Adjustments for prior years
– current tax
– deferred tax
Other
Total tax expense for the year

Recognised in other comprehensive income

Items which will not subsequently be reclassified to the Income statement:
Remeasurements of defined benefit pension liability

Recognised directly in equity

Current tax on share based payment transactions

2019 
£m

3.3
(1.3)
2.0

3.6
0.2
3.8
5.8

2019 
£m

48.6
9.2
0.1
–
(2.0)
(0.4)
–

(1.3)
0.2
–
5.8

2019 
£m

3.5

2019 
£m
(0.1)

2018 
£m

4.2
(0.8)
3.4

3.0
0.3
3.3
6.7

2018 
£m

37.9
7.2
0.3
–
–
(0.3)
–

(0.8)
0.3
–
6.7

2018 
£m

2.4

2018 
£m
(0.1)

The main UK Corporation tax rate remained at 19% (2018: 19%) and will further reduce to 17% with effect from 1 April 2020 which should reduce the 
Group’s future current tax charge accordingly.

The Group maintains a provision against tax risks, which is included within income tax payable.

The total tax expense above includes tax credits of £nil (2018: £0.4m) in respect of amortisation of acquired intangibles and tax on exceptional items 
of £2.0m (2018: £1.2m).

86

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

 
Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

8. EARNINGS PER SHARE

The earnings per share calculation is based on the profit attributable to the equity shareholders of Wincanton plc of £42.8m (2018: £31.2m) and 
the weighted average shares in issue excluding those held within an Employee Benefit Trusts, throughout the year as calculated below of 124.0m 
(2018: 123.8m). The diluted earnings per share calculation is based on there being 1.3m (2018: 2.1m) additional shares deemed to be issued at £nil 
consideration under the Company’s share option schemes.

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares (basic)
Issued Ordinary Shares at the beginning of the year1
Net effect of shares issued and purchased during the year

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares (diluted)
Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares for the year (as above)
Effect of share options on issue

2019 
millions

2018 
millions

123.7
0.3
124.0

124.0
1.3
125.3

123.5
0.3
123.8

123.8
2.1
125.9

1  The number of shares excludes 0.8m Ordinary Shares (2018: 0.3m) being the weighted average number of the Company’s own shares held within an Employee Benefit Trust.

An alternative earnings per share measure is set out below, being earnings before amortisation of acquired intangibles and exceptional items, 
including related tax and exceptional tax items where applicable, since the Directors consider that this provides further information on the underlying 
performance of the Group:

Underlying earnings per share
– basic
– diluted

Underlying earnings are determined as follows:

Profit for the year attributable to equity shareholders of Wincanton plc
Exceptional items
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
Tax impact of above items and exceptional tax items
Underlying earnings

9. DIVIDENDS

Dividends paid in the year comprise:

Final dividend for the year ended 31 March 2018 of 6.63p per share (2017: 6.1p)
Interim dividend for the period ended 30 September 2018 of 3.60p per share (2017: 3.27p)

Note

4
10

2019 
pence

33.5
33.1

2019 
£m
42.8
0.7
–
(2.0)
41.5

2019 
£m
8.2
4.5
12.7

2018 
pence

30.8
30.3

2018 
£m
31.2
6.2
2.3
(1.6)
38.1

2018 
£m
7.6
4.0
11.6

The Directors are proposing a final dividend of 7.29p per share for the year ended 31 March 2019 (2018: 6.63p) which, if approved by shareholders, 
will be paid on 2 August 2019 to shareholders on the register on 5 July 2019, an estimated total of £9.0m. The proposed final dividend is subject to 
approval by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 27 June 2019 and in accordance with Adopted IFRS has not been included as a liability 
in these financial statements.

In setting the dividend the Directors have considered a range of factors, including the Group‘s strategy (including downside sensitivities), the Group’s 
net debt position, the current and projected level of distributable reserves and projected cash flows including cash payments to the pension scheme. 

The Employee Benefit Trust has waived the right to receive dividends in respect of the shares it holds, see Note 22 for further detail.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

87

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

10. GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Cost
At 1 April 2017
Effect of movements in foreign exchange
Disposals
At 31 March 2018
At 1 April 2018
Effect of movements in foreign exchange
Additions
Disposals
At 31 March 2018
Amortisation and impairment losses
At 1 April 2017
Charge for year
Disposals
At 31 March 2018
At 1 April 2018
Charge for year
Disposals
At 31 March 2019
Carrying value
At 1 April 2017
At 31 March 2018 
At 31 March 2019

Note

Goodwill 
£m

Acquired 
intangibles 
£m

Computer 
software costs 
£m

79.9
0.1
–
80.0
80.0
(0.1)
–
–
79.9

(2.5)
–
–
(2.5)
(2.5)
–
–
(2.5)

77.4
77.5
77.4

66.5
–
–
66.5
66.5
–
–
–
66.5

(64.2)
(2.3)
–
(66.5)
(66.5)
–
–
(66.5)

2.3
–
–

39.8
–
(0.6)
39.2
39.2
–
3.3
(0.1)
42.4

(32.6)
(1.9)
0.5
(34.0)
(34.0)
(1.9)
0.1
(35.8)

7.2
5.2
6.6

3, 4

3, 4

Total 
£m

186.2
0.1
(0.6)
185.7
185.7
(0.1)
3.3
(0.1)
188.8

(99.3)
(4.2)
0.5
(103.0)
(103.0)
(1.9)
0.1
(104.8)

86.9
82.7
84.0

Assets under construction of £3.0m (2018: £nil) are included within computer software costs. 

The total amortisation charge of £1.9m (2018: £4.2m) is recognised in the income statement with £1.9m (2018: £1.9m) of computer software 
amortisation included within cost of sales and £nil (2018: £2.3m) of amortisation of acquired intangibles within administrative expenses.

Impairment tests for goodwill
Goodwill is allocated to groups of cash-generating units (CGUs) which are in line with the Group’s reported operating segments, 
as per the table below.

Retail & Consumer
Industrial & Transport

2019 
£m
25.8
51.6
77.4

2018 
£m
25.8
51.7
77.5

The recoverable amount of groups of CGUs is determined based on value in use calculations. These calculations are cash flow projections based on 
the financial budgets and forecasts approved by the Board for the forthcoming financial year and 24 months beyond. The financial budgets and 
forecasts have been set on a contract by contract basis, taking account of prior year results and expected developments. Cash flows beyond those 
12-month and further 24-month periods are extrapolated to perpetuity using the estimated long term growth rates stated below, which do not 
exceed the long term average growth in the specific geographical area where the groups of CGUs operate.

Key assumptions used for value in use calculations: 

Estimated growth rate
Discount rate

2019

Retail & 
Consumer 
%
1.5
11.0

Industrial &  
Transport 
%
1.5
11.0

2018

Retail & 
Consumer 
%
3.8
12.3

Industrial &  
Transport 
%
3.8
12.4

88

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

10. GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS (CONTINUED)

Management determined the growth rates based on expectations for market development and these are consistent with external forecasts and 
historical trends. The methodology for determining the pre-tax discount rates has been updated to remove the underlying inflation rate from both 
growth rates and discount rates.

Sensitivity to changes in assumptions
The estimated recoverable amounts for both the Retail & Consumer and the Industrial & Transport CGUs exceed their respective carrying amounts 
by approximately £365m and £124m (2018: £300m and £96m) respectively. The Group has conducted sensitivity analysis on the impairment 
testing. Management believe no significant change in the key assumptions would cause the carrying amount to exceed the recoverable amount 
for either CGU.

11. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Cost
At 1 April 2017
Additions
Disposals
Reclassified as assets held for sale
At 31 March 2018
At 1 April 2018
Additions
Disposals
Reclassified as assets held for sale
At 31 March 2019
Depreciation and impairment losses
At 1 April 2017
Charge for year
Disposals
Reclassified as assets held for sale
At 31 March 2018
At 1 April 2018
Charge for year
Disposals
Reclassified as assets held for sale
At 31 March 2019
Carrying amount
At 31 March 2017 and 1 April 2017
At 31 March 2018 
At 31 March 2019

Within plant and equipment, £0.3m (2018: £nil) relates to assets under construction. 

The carrying amount of property comprises:

Freehold
Short leasehold

Note

Property 
£m

Plant and 
equipment 
£m

3

3

3, 4

3, 4

42.6
0.6
(0.9)
(10.5)
31.8
31.8
0.1
(4.5)
(6.8)
20.6

(28.8)
(0.7)
0.8
4.7
(24.0)
(24.0)
(0.9)
3.7
4.4
(16.8)

13.8
7.8
3.8

139.1
13.9
(12.1)
(0.3)
140.6
140.6
6.3
(19.8)
(0.7)
126.4

(109.1)
(9.3)
11.7
–
(106.7)
(106.7)
(8.6)
18.9
0.7
(95.7)

30.0
33.9
30.7

2019 
£m
0.3
3.5
3.8

Total 
£m

181.7
14.5
(13.0)
(10.8)
172.4
172.4
6.4
(24.3)
(7.5)
147.0

(137.9)
(10.0)
12.5
4.7
(130.7)
(130.7)
(9.5)
22.6
5.1
(112.5)

43.8
41.7
34.5

2018 
£m
3.8
4.0
7.8

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

89

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

12. INVESTMENTS IN SUBSIDIARIES

The significant subsidiaries and jointly controlled entity as at 31 March 2019 in the Wincanton group of companies, based on the scale of their 
activities, are as follows:

Wincanton Holdings Limited
Wincanton Group Limited 
Wincanton UK Limited4
Wincanton Ireland Limited
Risk Underwriting (Guernsey) Limited
Wincanton Pullman Fleet Services Limited
UDS Properties Limited
C.E.L. Group Limited
Corstor Limited

Principal activity
Contract logistics services
Contract logistics services
Intermediate holding company
Contract logistics services
Insurance subsidiary
Maintenance and repair of motor vehicles
Building and letting of specialised warehousing facilities
Intermediate holding company
Container storage and repair

% of equity held5
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
50

Other subsidiaries and jointly controlled entity as at 31 March 2019:

C.E.L. (Engineering) Limited 
CEL (Logistics) Limited
City Self Storage Limited
Data and Records Management Limited
East Anglia Freight Terminal (Holdings) Limited
East Anglia Freight Terminal Limited 
Glass Glover Group Limited
Glass Glover Management Services Limited
Hanbury Davies Containers Limited
Hanbury Davies Limited
Hanbury Holdings Limited
House of Hill Holdings Limited
House of Hill Limited
Lane Group plc
Minmar (662) Limited
Nair Properties Limited
Onevast Limited
Product Support (Holdings) Limited
Product Support Limited
Pullman Fleet Services Limited
RDL Distribution Limited
RDL Holdings Limited
R-Log Limited
Roadtanks Limited
Storedco Limited
Swales Haulage Limited
Trans European Holdings Limited
W. Carter (Haulage) Limited
W O Bradstreet Limited
Wincanton (No. 1) Limited
Wincanton (No. 2) Limited
Wincanton Air & Ocean Limited
Wincanton High Tech Limited
Wincanton Logistics Limited

Principal activity
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant

90

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

% of equity held5
100
100
100
100
84.56
100
100
1007
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1008
100
100
100
100
50
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1009
1001  0
100

Country of incorporation 
and registered office
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
Republic of Ireland3
Guernsey2
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1

Country of incorporation 
and registered office
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
Republic of Ireland3
Republic of Ireland3
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1
England and Wales1

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

12. INVESTMENTS IN SUBSIDIARIES (CONTINUED)

Wincanton Pension Scheme Trustees Limited4
Wincanton Records Management (Ireland) Limited
Wincanton Trans European (Ireland) Limited
Wincanton Trans European Limited
Wincanton Vehicle Rentals Limited

Principal activity
Trustee for the Wincanton plc Pension Scheme 
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant

% of equity held5
100
100
100
100
100

Country of incorporation 
and registered office
England and Wales1
Republic of Ireland3
Republic of Ireland3
England and Wales1
England and Wales1

1  Registered office: Methuen Park, Chippenham, Wiltshire, SN14 0WT.

2  Registered office: Maison Trinity, Trinity Square, St Peter Port, Guernsey, GY1 4AT.

3  Registered office: Unit 1, Rosemount Business Park, Ballycoolin Road, Blanchardstown, Dublin 11.

4  Direct subsidiary of Wincanton plc.

5  All holdings are of Ordinary Shares except where noted.

6  3 ordinary shares and 84,500 B shares.

7  14,762,245 ordinary shares and 10,000,000 6½% cumulative convertible redeemable preference shares.

8  13,600,000 ordinary shares and 409,164 preference shares.

9  19,393,774 ordinary shares and 19,372,074 deferred shares.

10 100 ordinary shares and 1,699,900 redeemable ordinary shares.

13. INVESTMENTS INCLUDING THOSE EQUITY ACCOUNTED

Included in the consolidated financial statements of the Group are the following amounts in respect of the Group’s share of the assets and liabilities 
of its joint venture:

Current assets
Aggregate carrying amount of the Group’s interest in its joint venture

The Group also held a trade investment of £0.1m (2018: £nil).

14. DEFERRED TAX ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

Recognised deferred tax assets and liabilities
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are attributable to the following:

2019 
£m
0.1
0.1

Assets

Liabilities

Net

2019 
£m
2.4
0.5
1.2
0.1
–
4.2

2018 
£m
2.3
0.6
8.4
0.3
(0.1)
11.5

2019 
£m
–
–
–
–
–
–

2018 
£m
–
–
–
–
–
–

Property, plant and equipment
Equity compensation benefits
Pension provisions
Other assets
Other liabilities

Unrecognised deferred tax assets and liabilities

Deferred tax asset on losses carried forward

2019 
£m
2.4
0.5
1.2
0.1
–
4.2

2019 
£m
–

2018 
£m
0.1
0.1

2018 
£m
2.3
0.6
8.4
0.3
(0.1)
11.5

2018 
£m
0.3

Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of losses carried forward due to the uncertainty of their utilisation in the relevant companies.

Movement in deferred tax assets and liabilities during the current year

Property, plant and equipment
Equity compensation benefits
Pension provisions
Other assets
Other liabilities

At 1 April  
2018 
£m
2.3
0.6
8.4
0.3
(0.1)
11.5

Recognised in 
income 
£m
0.1
(0.1)
(3.7)
(0.2)
0.1
(3.8)

Other  
movements 
£m
–
–
(3.5)
–
–
(3.5)

At 31 March  
2019 
£m
2.4
0.5
1.2
0.1
–
4.2

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

91

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

15. INVENTORIES

Raw materials and consumables

16. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Trade receivables 
Contract receivables
Contract fulfilment assets
Other receivables
Prepayments (2018: Prepayments and accrued income)

2019 
£m
3.7

2019 
£m
78.6
31.0
1.5
–
26.6
137.7

2018 
£m
4.4

2018 
£m
80.3
–
–
0.4
60.01
140.7

1  Includes balances totalling £27.9m which would be reported as contract receivables and £0.6m which would be reported as contract fulfilment assets under IFRS 15.

Trade receivables and contract receivables are shown net of allowance for impairment of £0.8m (2018: £0.8m). All receivables are due within one year, 
except for contract receivables which include £1.7m (2018: £nil) in respect of amounts recoverable from customers and contract fulfilment assets of 
£0.9m. In the prior year other receivables of £0.4m and prepayments and accrued income of £0.2m were due in more than one year.

The contract receivables relate to the Group’s rights to consideration for work completed but not billed at the reporting date. They are transferred to 
receivables when the amounts are invoiced. See Note 29 for further information on the adoption of IFRS 15 in the year.

The Group has a non-recourse trade receivable financing arrangement in place at the year end. As these receivables have been sold without recourse 
they have been derecognised in the table above.

Movement in the allowance for impairment loss

At 1 April
Impairment losses recognised on receivables
Amounts written off as unrecoverable
At 31 March

Ageing of trade receivables and contract receivables at the balance sheet date

Contract receivables
Current
1 month overdue
2 months overdue
3+ months overdue
Gross trade receivables and contract receivables
Allowance for impairment
Trade receivables and contract receivables, net of allowance

2019 
£m
0.8
0.1
(0.1)
0.8

2019
Gross 
£m
31.1
75.9
1.3
0.7
1.4
110.4
(0.8)
109.6

2018 
£m
0.8
0.1
(0.1)
0.8

2018
Gross 
£m
–
79.1
0.7
0.1
1.2
81.1
(0.8)
80.3

Sensitivity analysis
Trade receivables and contract receivables are assessed for impairment using a calculated credit loss assumption. A 0.1% increase in the assumed 
credit risk factor would increase impairment by £0.1m. There were no material individual impairments of trade receivables or contract receivables. 

17. ASSETS CLASSIFIED AS HELD FOR SALE

At 31 March 2019 the Group has committed to a plan and is actively marketing two properties for which the sale is highly probable within the next 
year. The net proceeds of the disposals are expected to exceed the carrying value and accordingly no impairment loss has been recognised on 
reclassification. One property is held within Retail & Consumer, the other is held within Industrial & Transport.

At 31 March 2018 the Group had exchanged contracts for the disposal of a property. Completion of the disposal was conditional on the property 
being in an acceptable condition. The disposal completed during the year, with an exceptional profit of £6.0m relating to the disposal less transition 
costs being recognised in the year ended 31 March 2019.

92

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

18. CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

Cash at bank and in hand
Restricted cash deposits held by the Group’s insurance subsidiary
Cash and cash equivalents 

Details of the Group’s treasury policies are set out in Note 27.

19. BORROWINGS AND OTHER FINANCIAL LIABILITIES

Non-current
Bank loans
Other financial liabilities

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities, excluding interest payments:

At 31 March 2019

2019 
£m
7.9
4.8
12.7

2019 
£m

32.0
–
32.0

2018 
£m
11.7
5.9
17.6

2018 
£m

47.0
0.1
47.1

Non-derivative financial liabilities
Bank loans and overdrafts
Trade and other payables

At 31 March 2018

Non-derivative financial liabilities
Bank loans and overdrafts
Trade and other payables
Derivative financial liabilities
Interest rate swaps
Forward foreign exchange contracts

Carrying 
amount 
£m

Contractual 
cash flows 
£m

Less than 
1 year 
£m

Between 
1 and 5 years 
£m

Over 
5 years 
£m

32.0
175.8
207.8

32.0
175.8
207.8

–
175.8
175.8

32.0
–
32.0

–
–
–

Carrying 
amount 
£m

Contractual 
cash flows 
£m

Less than 
1 year 
£m

Between 
1 and 5 years 
£m

Over 
5 years 
£m

47.0
264.1

0.2
(0.1)
311.2

47.0
264.1

0.2
(0.1)
311.2

–
264.1

0.1
(0.1)
264.1

47.0
–

0.1
–
47.1

Bank loans and overdrafts comprise the Group’s revolving credit facility. The contractual interest payable on the amounts drawn at the year end 
was £0.1m.

20. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Current
Trade payables
Other taxes and social security
Other payables
Contract liabilities
Accruals (2018: Accruals and deferred income)

2019 
£m

62.2
41.4
22.6
43.6
91.0
260.8

1  Balance includes deferred income of £41.0m which would be reported as contract liabilities under IFRS 15. 

The contract liabilities primarily relate to the consideration invoiced to customers in advance of the work being completed. See Note 29 for further 
information on the adoption of IFRS 15 in the year.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

93

–
–

–
–
–

2018 
£m

54.8
39.9
27.5
–
141.91
264.1

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

21. PROVISIONS

At 1 April 2018
Provisions made during the year
Provisions used during the year
Provisions released during the year
Unwinding of discount
At 31 March 2019

Current 
Non-current

Note

6

Insurance 
£m
28.1
10.3
(7.6)
(5.3)
0.6
26.1

6.5
19.6
26.1

Property 
£m
18.0
1.8
(2.5)
(4.0)
0.2
13.5

2.7
10.8
13.5

Other 
provisions 
£m
4.8
0.8
(3.6)
(1.1)
–
0.9

0.9
–
0.9

Total 
£m
50.9
12.9
(13.7)
(10.4)
0.8
40.5

10.1
30.4
40.5

The Group owns 100% of the share capital of an insurance company which insures certain of the risks of the Group. The insurance provisions in 
the above table are held in respect of outstanding insurance claims, the majority of which are expected to be paid within one to seven years. 
Provisions are released when the obligation no longer exists or there is a reduction in management’s estimate of the liability. The discount unwinding 
arises primarily on the employers’ liability policy which is discounted over a period of seven years at a rate based on the Group’s assessment of a risk 
free rate.

The property provisions are determined on a site by site basis and comprise both provisions for onerous leases and dilapidations. The onerous lease 
provision is the Group’s best estimate of the expected costs of empty and under-utilised properties. Dilapidation provisions comprise dilapidation 
estimates made in the normal course of business. Provisions are released when the obligation no longer exists or there is a reduction in the 
estimate. The onerous lease provisions are utilised over the relevant lease term, with the majority expected to be utilised over the next three years. 
The dilapidations provisions are expected to be utilised at the end of the lease term. Estimated costs have been discounted at a rate based on the 
Group’s assessment of a risk free rate, with any estimated income being discounted at a rate reflecting an appropriate level of risk.

Other provisions include the estimated costs of prior year restructuring together with provision for sundry claims and settlements where the outcome 
is uncertain.

22. CAPITAL AND RESERVES

Share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid
At 1 April
Issued during the year
In issue at 31 March

10p Ordinary Shares

2019 
millions
124.5
–
124.5

2018 
millions
123.7
0.8
124.5

The number of shares detailed above differs from those in Note 8 as a result of the inclusion, in the above total, of the shares held within an Employee 
Benefit Trust (EBT) and also the effect of weighting for the purpose of the earnings per share calculations.

The holders of Ordinary Shares are entitled to receive dividends as declared from time to time. At general meetings of shareholders each shareholder 
(or appointed proxy) present in person is entitled to vote; on a show of hands each person has one vote, and on a poll has one vote per share. 
In respect of the Company’s shares that are held by the EBT (see over), all rights are suspended until these shares are reissued.

During the year ended 31 March 2002, the Company established a Capital Redemption Reserve of £49,998 on redemption of redeemable 
preference shares.

Merger reserve
The merger reserve arose from the original acquisition of the then Wincanton group of companies by Wincanton plc, on the demerger from the 
previous parent in May 2001, which was accounted for under merger accounting principles.

Hedging reserve
Where a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the variability in cash flows of a highly probable forecast transaction, the effective 
part of the gain or loss on the derivative is recognised directly in equity within the hedging reserve. When the forecast transaction that was being 
hedged is realised the cumulative gain or loss on the derivative is recognised in the income statement in the same period.

Translation reserve
The translation reserve comprises all foreign exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of foreign operations as well 
as from any translation of liabilities that hedge the Company’s net investment in foreign subsidiaries.

94

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

22. CAPITAL AND RESERVES (CONTINUED)

Own shares
The own shares reserve comprises the cost of the Company’s shares held by the EBT established in Jersey and managed on its behalf by independent 
trustees. At 31 March 2019, the number of the Company’s shares held by the EBT had increased to 896,024 (2018: 804,950). The EBT has waived the right 
to receive dividends in respect of the shares it holds. The average cost of the shares held is 242p each (2018: 245p) and at 31 March 2019, the market 
value of the shares held was £2.1m (2018: £1.8m).

All of the shares in the EBT are held in respect of the Group’s various equity compensation schemes (see Note 26) and at 31 March 2019 there 
were 128,048 (2018: 589,367) shares held in respect of vested options.

23. CAPITAL COMMITMENTS

Capital commitments for the Group at the end of the financial year for which no provision has been made, are as follows:

Contracted

24. OPERATING LEASES

2019 
£m
0.6

2018 
£m
0.3

Leases as lessee
The Group leases warehousing facilities, commercial vehicles and other logistics equipment for use in its operations. Typical lease periods for new 
warehouse rental contracts are between three and ten years although older rental contracts are for longer periods with intervening break clauses. 
The average period for vehicles and equipment is five years. The amounts charged to the income statement in the current and prior years are shown 
in Note 4.

The total future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases fall due for repayment as follows:

Less than 1 year
Between 1 and 5 years
More than 5 years

2019

2018

Plant and 
equipment 
£m
24.3
35.5
0.2
60.0

Land and 
buildings 
£m
14.5
28.4
98.9
141.8

Plant and 
equipment 
£m
24.9
48.2
1.7
74.8

Land and 
buildings 
£m
18.1
39.2
101.8
159.1

Wherever possible these commitments are mitigated through contractual commitments from customers for whom the properties are occupied 
and/or vehicles and plant are rented. The degree of mitigation can be banded according to the nature of the contract between the Group and its 
customers. This includes ‘back-to-back’ leases which are fully underwritten by customers throughout the life of the lease and multi-user locations 
where, although there is no specific matching of lease and contract terms, there are varying degrees of contract backing and therefore mitigation 
is spread across a number of customers.

A summary of leases by customer contract type is shown in the following table:

Element of lease underwritten by customer contract
Element of lease where the period of the lease extends beyond the current  

maturity of the customer contract

Multi-user locations where mitigation is spread across a number of customers
Leases with limited or no mitigation

Covered by property provision

2019

Plant and 
equipment 
£m
47.4

5.5
6.2
0.9
60.0
–
60.0

Land and 
buildings 
£m
14.4

3.9
119.8
1.5
139.6
2.2
141.8

2018

Plant and 
equipment 
£m
63.0

4.9
6.0
0.9
74.8
–
74.8

Land and 
buildings 
£m
19.9

8.8
119.7
4.2
152.6
6.5
159.1

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

95

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

25. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS

The employee benefit liabilities of the Group comprise the post-retirement obligations of the Group’s pension arrangements, which are discussed in 
detail below:

Pension schemes (see below)
These employee benefits are all classed as non-current.

2019 
£m
7.1

2018 
£m
49.5

Pension schemes
Employees of Wincanton participated in funded pension arrangements in the UK and Ireland during the year ended 31 March 2019 details of which 
are given below.

The principal Wincanton Scheme in the UK (the Scheme) is a funded arrangement which has two defined benefit sections and two defined 
contribution sections, called the Wincanton Retirement Savings Section and the Wincanton Pension Builder Plan. The employees of Wincanton 
Ireland Limited are eligible to participate in a separate defined contribution scheme. Assets of these pension arrangements are held in separate 
Trustee administered funds independent of Wincanton. The weighted average duration of the funded defined benefit obligation is approximately 
19 years.

In previous years, a small number of employees, who were subject to the statutory earnings cap on pensionable earnings prior to 6 April 2006, were 
entitled to participate in an unfunded unapproved arrangement in addition to accruing benefits from the Scheme. There have been no active 
members of this arrangement throughout current or comparative years.

The defined benefit sections of the Scheme were closed to future accrual on 31 March 2014. This means that no future service benefit will accrue but 
pensions built up to the date of closure have been preserved.

Triennial valuation
The latest formal valuation of the Scheme was carried out as at 31 March 2017 by the Scheme actuary, Hymans Robertson, and was agreed with the 
Trustee during the year. The annual deficit funding contributions have been agreed at £18.0m per annum increasing by RPI over the three years to 
March 2021, followed by £25.0m per annum increasing by RPI from April 2022 to March 2027. In addition, the Group made a one-off contribution of 
£15.0m in August 2018. The agreement is also subject to other provisions agreed with the Trustee being:

 • Additional contributions become payable if distributions to shareholders (dividends and share-buy-backs) grow year-on-year in excess of 10%. 
The matching will only be in relation to the distribution amounts above the threshold, and are calculated at 50% of the excess or 100% of any 
distribution growth above 15%.

 • Additional contribution payments become payable in the event of severe adverse Scheme investment performance where the actual deficit in the 

Scheme exceeds an agreed threshold above the expected deficit at the end of two consecutive six-month reporting periods.

 • A one-off payment to the Scheme of £6.0m in any year if both the underlying profit after tax is lower than the level of profit after tax reported in the 

2017/18 financial year and the dividend payout ratio increases to over 40% of profit after tax.

 • In the event of disposals of businesses within the Group, an amount will be paid to the Scheme equal to 50% of the combined net proceeds for the 

first £30.0m of the proceeds in any financial year.

As with the previous agreement, it has been agreed that certain administration expenses would be paid directly by the Group and deducted from the 
deficit funding contributions. The expenses, which amount to £0.7m (2018: £0.7m) are not included in the contributions below.

The agreement constitutes a minimum funding requirement (MFR) under IFRIC 14 IAS 19 The limit on a Defined Benefit Asset, Minimum Funding 
Requirements and their Interaction. The Group has not recognised any liabilities in relation to this MFR as any surplus would be recoverable as the 
Group has an unconditional right to a refund. 

Contributions
The deficit funding contribution in the year, net of the above expenses was £32.3m, which includes the one-off contribution of £15.0m (2018: £16.1m 
including a £1.5m top up payment to the Scheme as a result of an enhanced transfer value exercise).

In the year commencing 1 April 2019, the Group is expected to make deficit funding contributions of £18.4m (£17.7m after deduction of certain 
administration expenses mentioned above). In addition, other administration costs of the Scheme will be borne directly by the Group, these are 
expected to total £0.6m.

Risks
The defined benefit sections of the Scheme expose the Group to various risks: longevity risk (members living longer than expected), inflation and 
interest rate risk (higher or lower than expected), and market (investment) risk (lower returns than expected). The Trustee and Group have taken steps 
to mitigate these risks through the use of:

 • hedging instruments within the investment portfolio; and

 • diversification of the investment portfolio.

The Group is not exposed to any unusual, entity specific or scheme specific risks.

96

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

25. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS (CONTINUED)

Net defined benefit liability
The assets and liabilities of the defined benefit sections of the Group are calculated in accordance with IAS 19 Employee Benefits (Revised) and are set 
out in the tables below.

The calculations under IAS 19 are based on actuarial assumptions which are the best estimates chosen from a range of possible assumptions about 
the long term future which, unless by chance, will not necessarily be borne out in practice. The fair value of the assets, which are not intended to be 
realised in the short term, may be subject to significant change before they are realised, and the present value of the liabilities are derived from cash 
flow projections over long periods and are thus inherently uncertain.

Present value of unfunded defined benefit obligations
Present value of funded defined benefit obligations
Fair value of Scheme assets
Net defined benefit liability

2019 
£m
(2.5)
(1,151.2)
1,146.6
(7.1)

2018 
£m
(2.3)
(1,123.1)
1,075.9
(49.5)

The movement in the above net defined benefit liability in the year was primarily the result of a reduction in liabilities due to changes in demographic 
assumptions, an increase in the market value of the investments and contributions received from the Group, being partly offset by an increase in 
liabilities resulting from a decrease in the discount rate and an increase in the inflation rate assumption. The net defined benefit liability, after taking 
into account the related deferred tax asset, is £5.9m (2018: £41.1m).

Movements in the present value of the net defined benefit liability

31 March 2019
Opening position
Included in Income statement:
  Administration costs 
  Past service cost

Interest on the net defined benefit liability

Cash:
  Employer contributions
  Benefits paid
Included in Other comprehensive income:
  Changes in financial assumptions
  Changes in demographic assumptions
  Experience 

 Return on assets excluding amounts included  
in net financing costs

Closing defined benefit liability

31 March 2018
Opening position
Included in Income statement:
  Administration costs 
  Effects of settlements

Interest on the net defined benefit liability

Cash:
  Employer contributions
  Benefits paid
Included in Other comprehensive income:
  Changes in financial assumptions
  Changes in demographic assumptions
  Experience 

 Return on assets excluding amounts included  
in net financing costs

Closing defined benefit liability

Note

4

Assets 
£m
1,075.9

Obligations
£m
(1,123.1)

Net liability 
£m
(47.2)

Unfunded 
arrangements 
£m
(2.3)

Total  
net liability 
£m
(49.5)

(1.9)
–
28.0

33.2
(36.2)

–
–
–

–
(8.2)
(28.9)

–
36.2

(58.7)
25.0
6.5

47.6
1,146.6

–
(1,151.2)

(1.9)
(8.2)
(0.9)

33.2
–

(58.7)
25.0
6.5

47.6
(4.6)

–
–
(0.1)

–
–

(0.1)
–
–

–
(2.5)

(1.9)
(8.2)
(1.0)

33.2
–

(58.8)
25.0
6.5

47.6
(7.1)

Assets 
£m
1,080.5

Obligations 
£m
(1,156.7)

Net liability 
£m
(76.2)

Unfunded 
arrangements 
£m
(2.2)

Total  
net liability 
£m
(78.4)

(1.7)
(25.8)
27.3

16.8
(39.5)

–
–
–

–
27.6
(29.1)

–
39.5

(33.4)
23.8
5.2

18.3
1,075.9

–
(1,123.1)

(1.7)
1.8
(1.8)

16.8
–

(33.4)
23.8
5.2

18.3
(47.2)

–
–
–

–
–

(0.1)
–
–

–
(2.3)

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

(1.7)
1.8
(1.8)

16.8
–

(33.5)
23.8
5.2

18.3
(49.5)

97

 
 
 
 
Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

25. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS (CONTINUED)

The amounts recognised in the income statement comprise administration costs, past service costs, the effect of settlements and interest on the net 
defined benefit liability. These charges are included in the following lines in the income statement:

Within underlying operating profit:
Administrative expenses
Within exceptional items:
Past service costs
Effect of settlements
Within finance costs:
Interest on the net defined benefit liability
Recognised in Income statement

The market value of the Scheme assets held at the end of the year were as follows:

Equities and synthetic equities 
Hedge funds
Property and other growth assets
Corporate bonds
Multi asset credit
Secured finance
Senior real estate and private debt
Index-linked gilts (LDI portfolio collateral)
Notional exposure for synthetic equities/LDI hedging arrangements
Other, including cash

Note

6

2019 
£m

(1.9)

(8.2)
–

(1.0)
(11.1)

2019 
£m
143.3
–
7.1
302.9
–
86.6
118.6
593.4
(111.8)
6.5
1,146.6

2018 
£m

(1.7)

–
1.8

(1.8)
(1.7)

2018 
£m
214.5
51.1
16.3
118.0
82.6
–
98.9
576.9
(109.7)
27.3
1,075.9

All equities, LDI portfolio collateral, corporate bonds and funds have quoted prices in active markets. The senior real estate and private debt along 
with the property assets are illiquid assets and trade on a less regular basis.

The synthetic equities provide exposure to the UK, North America, Europe, Asia-Pacific and Japan. The LDI portfolio currently hedges 100% 
of the defined benefit scheme’s inflation rate risk and interest rate risk (relative to Scheme assets) through holding a combination of index-linked 
gilts, interest rate and inflation swaps, gilt total return swaps, gilt repos and cash. The Scheme does not directly hold any financial instruments 
issued by the Company.

Actuarial assumptions
The principal actuarial assumptions for the Scheme and for the UK unfunded arrangement at the balance sheet date were as follows:

Discount rate
Price inflation rate – RPI
Price inflation rate – CPI
Rate of increase of pensions in deferment
Rate of increase of pensions in payment1

2019 
%
2.40
3.45
2.45
2.45
1.90-3.30

2018 
%
2.60
3.35
2.35
2.35
1.85-3.25

1  A range of assumed rates exist due to the application of annual caps and floors to certain elements of service.

The assumptions used for mortality rates for members of these arrangements at the expected retirement age of 65 years are as follows:

Male aged 65 today
Male aged 45 today
Female aged 65 today
Female aged 45 today

98

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

2019 
Years
20.6
22.6
22.3
25.2

2018 
Years
21.1
23.0
22.9
25.4

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

25. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS (CONTINUED)

Sensitivity table
The sensitivity of the present value of the Scheme obligations to changes in the key actuarial assumptions are set out in the following table. 
The illustrations consider the result of only a single assumption changing with the others assumed unchanged and includes the impact of the 
interest rate and inflation rate hedging. In reality it is more likely that more than one assumption would change and potentially the results would 
offset each other, for example, a fall in interest rates will increase the Scheme obligations, but may also trigger an offsetting increase in market 
value of certain Scheme assets.

Discount rate
Price inflation – RPI
Mortality rate

Change in 
assumption
-0.1%
+0.1%
+ 1 year

Increase/
(decrease)  
in liability 
£m
22.0
16.0
46.0

Increase/
(decrease) 
 in assets 
£m
24.0
16.0
–

Defined contribution schemes
The total expense relating to the Group’s defined contribution schemes in the current year was £24.6m (2018: £19.0m).

26. EQUITY COMPENSATION BENEFITS

Employees of the Group participate, subject to seniority and length of service, in the Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP). The other scheme in existence is 
the Special Option Plan (SOP), although no grants were made in respect of this scheme in the year. Both of these schemes involve the grant of options 
or conditional awards of shares in the Company.

Grants of options are accounted for in accordance with IFRS 2 Share-based Payments, which requires the fair value of services received in return for 
share options granted to be recognised in the Income statement over the vesting period. The Group recognised total expenses of £1.0m (2018: £1.0m) 
in respect of the costs of equity-settled share based payment transactions during the year. The fair value of these services is measured by reference 
to the fair value of the share options granted under each scheme.

The number of options outstanding and exercisable in respect of each scheme at 31 March 2019 is as follows:

Long Term Incentive Plan
July 2015
July 2016
July 2017
July 2018
November 2018

Special Option Plan
July 2014
Total number of share options

Outstanding

Exercisable

Option price  
pence/share

Date normally 
exercisable

63,498
676,561
593,167
599,664
135,945
2,068,835

64,550
2,133,385

63,498
–
–
–
–
63,498

64,550
128,048

2018-2025
2019-2026
2020-2027
2021-2028
2021-2028

–
–
–
–
–
–

137

2017-2024

The number and weighted average exercise price of all share options extant under the above schemes are as follows:

Outstanding at beginning of period
Granted during the period
Lapsed during the period
Exercised during the period
Outstanding at the end of the period
Exercisable at the end of the period

2019

2018

Options
2,850,182
809,879
(353,648)
(1,173,027)
2,133,386
128,048

Weighted average 
pence
28
–
–
61
4
69

Options
5,436,334
710,691
(18,927)
(3,277,916)
2,850,182
589,367

Weighted average  
pence
70
–
–
91
28
137

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for share options exercised during the period was 258p (2018: 287p). The options outstanding 
at 31 March 2019 had a range of exercise prices of between nil and 69p and a weighted average remaining contractual life of nine years.

Awards made under the Special Option Plan and Long Term Incentive Plan were granted based on the average quoted market price of the 
Company’s shares for a period of up to three business days immediately prior to the date of grant. Upon exercise, all options granted under these 
schemes are equity-settled.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

99

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

26. EQUITY COMPENSATION BENEFITS (CONTINUED)

The terms and conditions of the grants to date under these schemes are as follows:

Long Term Incentive Plan
The Group introduced a Long Term Incentive Plan in 2015, which granted the Executive Directors and certain senior managers long term incentive 
awards in the form of nil cost options.

Grant  
date
July 2015 
September 2015 
July 2016 
November 2016 
July 2017
July 2018 
November 2018

Number of 
options granted
874,876
142,512
753,888
45,570
710,691
673,934
135,945

Total

3,337,416

Vesting 
conditions
3 years of service plus performance metrics weighted 60% on basic underlying 
EPS growth and 40% on TSR performance relative to the FTSE All-Share Index 
(excluding investment trusts) (the Index). The threshold entry point of 25% vesting 
for the EPS element requires 6% growth per annum, with 100% vesting at 11% 
per annum. The threshold entry point of 25% vesting for the TSR element requires 
performance in line with the Index, with 100% vesting at outperformance of 10% per 
annum (equivalent to 33% over the term of the option). Vesting will be on a straight-
line basis between the threshold and maximum for both elements.

Contractual 
life years
10

The grants made under this Plan have EPS and TSR growth performance conditions. The EPS requirement is a non-market based performance 
condition and the Black-Scholes option pricing model has been used to calculate the fair value of the award linked to EPS. The TSR requirement 
is a market based performance condition and the fair value is calculated using a Monte-Carlo pricing model, based on assumptions at the date 
of the award.

Share price at grant (p)
Exercise price (p)
Risk-free rate (%)
Expected volatility of Wincanton plc (%)
Expected volatility of Index (%)
Expected life (years)
Dividend yield (%)
Fair value per award under TSR condition (p)
Fair value per award under EPS condition (p)

November 
2018
Grant
222.0
–
0.85
30.3
11.2
3
3.6
100.0
199.0

July  
2018
grant
275.0
–
0.77
31.4
12.9
3
3.6
154.0
247.0

July  
2017 
grant
250.0
–
0.3
30.9
15.0
3
4.1
120.0
221.0

November 
2016 
grant
207.0
–
0.8
30.5
16.0
3
4.1
101.0
183.0

July  
2016 
grant
180.0
–
0.2
32.0
15.2
3
4.5
76.0
157.0

September 
2015  
grant
208.0
–
0.8
38.0
12.9
3
3.5
107.0
187.0

July  
2015 
grant
187.0
–
1.0
41.2
11.9
3
3.9
97.0
167.0

100

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

26. EQUITY COMPENSATION BENEFITS (CONTINUED)

Special Option Plan
Under the Special Option Plan, the Executive Directors and certain senior managers were granted long term incentive awards.

Vesting 
conditions
3 years of service plus an EPS underpin, where the Company’s EPS must not reduce 
over the 3-year vesting period, as well as a performance requirement based on average 
absolute TSR growth over 3 years (the option starts to vest at >10% per annum with 100% 
of the option vesting for 22% per annum).

Contractual 
life years
10

Grant  
date
September 2011
July 2012
January 2013
July 2013
September 2013
November 2013
July 2014
December 2014
Total

Number of 
options granted
6,060,549
13,293,685
1,059,322
5,868,259
128,395
114,993
2,746,551
250,517
29,522,271

The grant made under this Plan has an absolute TSR growth performance condition with an attaching EPS underpin. The EPS requirement is a 
non-market based performance condition and as such is not accounted for in the fair value calculation. The TSR requirement is a market based 
performance condition and the fair value is calculated by applying a discount to the option value. The discount is calculated using a Monte-Carlo 
pricing model and is the expected outcome of meeting the performance condition. The fair value is determined on assumptions at the date 
of the award.

Share price at grant (p)
Exercise price (p)
Risk-free rate (%)
Expected volatility (%)
Expected life (years)
Dividend yield (%)
Fair value (p)

27. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

December 
2014 
grant
155.0
160.7
1.2
42.8
5
4.7
29.0

July 
 2014 
grant
140.0
137.0
2.0
43.1
5
–
41.0

November 
2013 
grant
125.3
123.9
1.7
45.5
5
–
39.0

September 
2013 
grant
103.3
101.3
1.7
46.3
5
–
33.0

July  
2013 
grant
66.0
67.7
1.3
46.4
5
–
20.0

January  
2013 
grant
68.8
70.8
1.1
45.0
5
–
19.9

July  
2012 
grant
33.0
36.0
0.7
43.2
5
–
8.6

September 
2011 
grant
78.0
90.6
1.5
40.0
5
5.8
9.5

Financial risk management and treasury policies
The Group, through its activities, is exposed to a range of financial risks. Financial risks are managed through the Group’s centralised treasury function 
which acts within clearly defined policies approved by the Board. These policies are designed to reduce the financial risks faced by the Group relating 
to liquidity risk, market risk (being interest rates, equity prices and currency exchange rate exposure) and credit risk. Transactions of a speculative nature 
are not permitted and the treasury function does not operate as a profit centre.

Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group’s policy on funding capacity 
is to ensure that there is always sufficient long term funding and short term facilities in place to meet foreseeable peak borrowing requirements.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

101

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

27. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (CONTINUED)

The Group has a £141m (2018: £141m) committed syndicated bank facility which matures in October 2023. At 31 March 2019 £32m (2018: £47m) was 
drawn, leaving unutilised facilities of £109m (2018: £94m). The Group also has overdraft and other uncommitted facilities. The Group also holds cash 
deposits within its insurance subsidiary; these deposits have a mix of maturities, none of which is greater than 12 months. The Group’s net debt at the 
balance sheet date was:

Total borrowings and other financial liabilities
Cash and cash equivalents
Net debt

See Note 19 for further analysis of the contractual maturities of the financial liabilities.

Analysis of changes in net debt

Bank loans and overdrafts
Other financial liabilities
Financial liabilities arising from financing activities
Cash and bank balances
Net debt

Note
19
18

2019 
£m
(32.0)
12.7
(19.3)

2018 
£m
(47.1)
17.6
(29.5)

1 April 2018 
£m
(47.0)
(0.1)
(47.1)
17.6
(29.5)

Cash flow 
£m
15.0
0.1
15.1
(4.9)
10.2

31 March 2019 
£m
(32.0)
–
(32.0)
12.7
(19.3)

Market risk
Market risk is the risk that changes in market prices, such as interest rates and foreign exchange rates will affect the Group’s income or the value of its 
holdings of financial instruments.

Interest rate risk
The Group maintains a policy of using derivatives to achieve an appropriate balance between fixed, capped, and floating interest profiles, so as to limit 
the exposure to the cash cost of servicing its debt.

The majority of the Group’s drawn debt at 31 March 2019 was at floating rates. At 31 March 2019, the Group had in place a £20m five-year sterling 
interest rate swap (maturing 2020) with an effective rate of 2.0%. The carrying value of this swap at 31 March 2019 was £nil.

2019

2018

Sterling
Bank loans and overdrafts
Other financial liabilities
Borrowings
Cash
Net debt
Interest rate swap
Net debt/(cash)
Euro 
Cash
Net debt
Total net debt/(cash)

Floating 
rate 
£m

32.0
– 
32.0
(12.0)
20.0
(20.0)
–

(0.7)
(0.7)
(0.7)

Fixed 
rate 
£m

–
–
–
–
–
20.0
20.0

–
–
20.0

Total 
£m

32.0
–
32.0
(12.0)
20.0
–
20.0

(0.7)
(0.7)
19.3

Floating 
rate 
£m

47.0
0.1
47.1
(16.5)
30.6
(20.0)
10.6

(1.1)
(1.1)
9.5

Fixed 
rate 
£m

–
–
–
–
–
20.0
20.0

–
–
20.0

Total 
£m

47.0
0.1
47.1
(16.5)
30.6
–
30.6

(1.1)
(1.1)
29.5

102

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

27. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (CONTINUED)

Interest rate sensitivity
The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to a change in interest rates of 1% on the Group’s profit before tax and on its equity. The impact has 
been calculated by applying the change in interest rates to the weighted average interest rate during the year, and applying this rate to the average 
borrowings during the year, taking into account the impact of the interest rate swap of £20m. A variation of 1% represents management’s view of 
a reasonably possible change in interest rates. Any impact on equity excludes the possible effect which a change in interest rates may have on the 
present value of the Group’s pension obligations, the effects of which are set out in Note 25.

Sterling 
1.0% increase in rates
1.0% decrease in rates

2019

Effect 
on profit 
before tax 
£m

(0.6)
0.6

Effect  
on equity 
£m

(0.6)
0.6

2018

Effect 
on profit 
before tax 
£m

(0.6)
0.6

Effect  
on equity 
£m

(0.6)
0.6

The methods and assumptions used to calculate the possible effect of a change in interest rates are consistent with those used in the prior year.

Currency risk and sensitivity
The Group is a largely UK based business with a small proportion of the Group’s activities denominated in euro. The only non-sterling activity 
is in Ireland. In order to protect the sterling value of the balance sheet, the Group finances its investment in Ireland by borrowing in euro. 
Transactional exposure is minimal as the vast majority of transactions are denominated in euro, the relevant functional currency of the operation.

Operational foreign exchange risk, where purchases or sales are made in non functional currency, is hedged on an ad hoc basis by buying or selling 
the relevant currency on a forward basis if the amounts involved are material.

Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual obligations, 
and arises principally from the Group’s receivables from customers.

The Group has a credit policy in place and the exposure to credit risk is monitored on an ongoing basis. Deposits are only made with pre-approved 
counterparties. Credit evaluations are performed on all customers requiring credit. The Group does not generally require collateral in respect of 
financial assets. At the balance sheet date there were no significant concentrations of credit risk. The maximum exposure to credit risk is represented 
by the carrying amount of each financial asset, including derivative financial instruments, in the balance sheet of £122.3m (2018: £98.4m). See Note 16 
for further analysis of trade receivables and the associated allowance for impairment loss.

Capital risk management
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard its ability to continue as a going concern, in order to provide optimal returns for 
shareholders, and to maintain an efficient capital structure. The capital structure of the Group consists of net debt (as shown above) and equity of the 
Group (issued share capital, reserves and retained earnings).

In doing so, the Group’s strategy is to retain appropriate levels of liquidity headroom to ensure financial stability and flexibility. To achieve this 
strategy and maintain this position, the Group regularly monitors key credit metrics such as net debt to EBITDA, interest cover and fixed charge cover. 
In addition the Group ensures a combination of short term liquidity headroom with a diverse long term debt maturity profile. As at the balance sheet 
date the Group’s average debt maturity profile was 4.5 years.

In order to maintain or realign the capital structure, the Group may adjust the amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to shareholders, 
issue new shares, or sell assets to reduce debt.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

103

Accounts

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED

27. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (CONTINUED)

Fair values
The fair values of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, together with the carrying amounts shown in the balance sheet are given in the 
following table:

Trade receivables
Contract receivables
Other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Forward exchange contracts
Interest rate swaps
Bank loans and overdrafts
Trade and other payables
Unrecognised losses

2019

2018

Carrying amount 
£m
78.6
31.0
–
12.7
–
–
(32.0)
(175.8)

Fair value 
£m
78.6
31.0
–
12.7
–
–
(32.0)
(175.8)
–

Carrying amount 
£m
80.3
–
0.4
17.6
0.1
(0.2)
(47.0)
(183.9)

Fair value 
£m
80.3
–
0.4
17.6
0.1
(0.2)
(47.0)
(183.9)
–

Estimation of fair values
The following summarises the major methods and assumptions used in estimating the fair values of financial instruments reflected in the above table. 
Under the disclosure requirements of IFRS 13, all fair value measurements of financial assets and liabilities are considered to be categorised as level 2.

Derivatives
The fair value of forward exchange contracts is calculated as the contractual forward price less the current forward rate. The fair value of interest rate 
swaps was determined by discounting the future cash flows at rates determined by year-end yield curves.

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings and unsecured bond issues

Fair value is calculated on discounted expected future principal and interest cash flows at market interest rates.

28. RELATED PARTIES

Identity of related parties
The Group has a controlling related party relationship with its parent Company Wincanton plc. In addition the Group has related party relationships 
with its Executive and Non-executive Directors and with its subsidiaries and jointly controlled entities.

Transactions with Executive and Non-executive Directors
The interests of the Executive and Non-executive Directors in the share capital of the Company, plus full details of the individual Directors’ 
emoluments, bonuses deferred in shares, share options and pension entitlements are given in the Annual Report on Remuneration on pages 46 to 56.

The total of short term employee remuneration and benefits receivable by the Directors is set out in Note 5.

29. ADOPTION OF NEW ACCOUNTING STANDARDS 

In the current year, the Group has adopted and applied the following accounting standards issued by the International Accounting Standards Board 
that are relevant to the operations of the Group. 

 • IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’ 

 • IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ 

The impact of the adoption of these new standards on the Group’s financial statements is explained below. Neither of these standards has had 
a material impact on the financial statements of the Group. 

IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’ 
IFRS 9 became effective for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018 and replaced IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and 
Measurement’. IFRS 9 introduced new requirements for the classification and measurement of financial instruments, impairment of financial assets 
using an expected credit loss (ECL) model, and hedge accounting. 

The adoption of IFRS 9 did not have a material impact on the Group financial statements, the effect being limited to a change in the methodology 
used to calculate impairment of the Group’s financial assets. This change did not have significant impact on the net assets or profit for the year of the 
Group. The Group has elected not to restate comparative information for the effect of applying IFRS 9. 

Classification and measurement of financial assets 
The Directors have reviewed and assessed the Group’s financial assets and concluded that the application of IFRS 9 does not have an impact. 
Trade and other receivables, cash and cash equivalents will continue to be classified at amortised cost.

104

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

29. ADOPTION OF NEW ACCOUNTING STANDARDS (CONTINUED)

Impairment of financial assets 
IFRS 9 requires an expected credit loss approach to impairment rather than the incurred credit loss model under IAS 39. The Group has applied the 
simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses. This uses a lifetime expected loss allowance for all trade receivables and contract receivables. 

Balances have been grouped based on shared credit risk characteristics and the days past due. On this basis there is no significant impact compared 
to those previously recognised under IAS 39 Financial Instruments Recognition and Measurement.

Classification and measurement of financial liabilities 
All the Group’s financial liabilities are held at amortised cost. The IFRS 9 requirements regarding the classification and measurement of financial 
liabilities are broadly consistent with the previous standard, IAS 39. Accordingly, the adoption of IFRS 9 has had no impact on the classification and 
measurement of the Group’s financial liabilities. 

IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers was issued by the IASB in May 2014 and became effective for the Group from 1 April 2018. 
The Group has applied the cumulative catch-up approach, therefore comparative periods have not been restated, and are presented as previously 
reported, under IAS 18.

IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers 
Under IFRS 15, revenue is recognised when the customer obtains control of the goods and services transferred by the Group and the related 
performance obligations have been satisfied. The amount recognised reflects the amount of consideration that the Group expects to be entitled to in 
exchange for those goods and services. The primary effects of implementing IFRS 15 include changes in the timing of revenue recognition on certain 
contracts for costs to fulfil a contract of £1.1m and recognition of costs of obtaining a contract of £0.3m. The implementation of the standard did not 
have a material effect on the Group’s financial statements as at 1 April 2018, therefore no transition adjustment was made.

The following table summarises the quantitative impact of adopting IFRS 15 on the Group’s financial statements for the year ending 31 March 2019:

As reported 
£m

Adjustments 
£m

Reclassification
£m

Amounts without 
adoption of IFRS15 
£m

Income Statement
Revenue

Operating profit
Net financing costs
Income tax
Profit after tax

Consolidated Balance Sheet
Non-current assets
Current assets:
– Contract receivables
– Contract fulfilment costs
– Prepayments
– Prepayments and accrued income
– Other current assets

Current liabilities:
– Contract liabilities
– Accruals
– Accruals and deferred income
– Other current liabilities

Non-current liabilities
Net liabilities

The adjustments above comprise:

1,141.5

54.6
(6.0)
(5.8)
42.8

122.9

31.0
1.5
26.6
–
97.4
156.5

(43.6)
(91.0)
–
(142.4)
(277.0)
(69.5)
(67.1)

1.1

(0.3)
–
–
(0.3)

–

–
(0.3)
–
–
–
(0.3)

–
–
–
–
–
–
(0.3)

–

–
–
–
–

–

(31.0)
(1.2)
(26.6)
58.8
–
–

43.6
91.0
(134.6)
–
–
–
–

1,142.6

54.3
(6.0)
(5.8)
42.5

122.9

–
–
–
58.8
97.4
156.2

–
–
(134.6)
(142.4)
(277.0)
(69.5)
(67.4)

 • Costs to fulfil a contract £1.1m increase in revenue and £1.1m increase in costs of sales. Under IAS 18 Revenue the Group would have recognised 
project management costs incurred in mobilising a contract immediately. Revenue would also have been recognised where these costs are 
recoverable under the contract. Under IFRS 15 the costs are spread over the term of the contract and revenue recognised in line with the 
services performed.

 • Costs of obtaining a contract £(0.3)m increase in costs of sales, no revenue impact. Under IFRS 15 sales bonuses paid on obtaining new contracts 

are spread over the term of the contract obtained, previously these would have been expensed direct to the income statement in the year.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

105

Accounts

WINCANTON PLC COMPANY BALANCE SHEET

AT 31 MARCH 2019

Non-current assets
Investment in subsidiaries

Current assets
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents

Current liabilities
Net current assets
Total assets less current liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Net assets

Equity
Issued share capital
Share premium
Hedging reserve
Retained earnings
Total equity

Note

2

3

4

5

7

2019 
£m

108.9
108.9

70.0
4.6
74.6
(20.2)
54.4
163.3
(32.0)
131.3

12.5
12.9
–
105.9
131.3

2018 
£m

108.9
108.9

85.8
8.6
94.4
(31.2)
63.2
172.1
(47.1)
125.0

12.5
12.9
(0.1)
99.7
125.0

The Company reported a profit for the year ended 31 March 2019 of £20.5m (2018: £22.8m).

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 15 May 2019 and were signed on their behalf by:

A Colman 
Chief Executive Officer 

T Lawlor
Chief Financial Officer

Company Registration Number: 04178808

106

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

WINCANTON PLC COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

Balance at 1 April 2017

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income
Total comprehensive income

Share based payment transactions
Current tax on share based 
payment transactions
Own shares acquired
Shares issued
Dividends paid to shareholders
Balance at 31 March 2018

Balance at 1 April 2018

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income
Total comprehensive income

Share based payment transactions
Current tax on share based 
payment transactions
Own shares acquired
Dividends paid to shareholders
Balance at 31 March 2019

Issued  
share  
capital  
£m
12.4

Share  
premium  
£m
12.9

Hedging  
reserve  
£m
(0.1)

–
–
–

–

–
–
0.1
–
12.5

12.5

–
–
–

–

–
–
–
12.5

–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
12.9

12.9

–
–
–

–

–
–
–
12.9

Retained earnings

Own  
shares 
£m
(0.5)

–
–
–

0.7

–
(2.1)
(0.1)
–
(2.0)

Profit  
and loss 
£m
93.2

22.8
–
22.8

(2.8)

0.1
–
–
(11.6)
101.7

Total 
equity 
£m
117.9

22.8
–
22.8

(2.1)

0.1
(2.1)
–
(11.6)
125.0

–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–
(0.1)

(0.1)

(2.0)

101.7

125.0

–
0.1
0.1

–

–
–
–
–

–
–
–

1.3

–
(1.5)
–
(2.2)

20.5
–
20.5

(1.5)

0.1
–
(12.7)
108.1

20.5
0.1
20.6

(0.2)

0.1
(1.5)
(12.7)
131.3

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

107

Accounts

NOTES TO THE WINCANTON PLC COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES

The following accounting policies have been applied consistently in dealing with items which are considered material in relation to the Company’s 
financial statements.

Basis of preparation
The separate financial statements of the Company are presented as required by the Companies Act 2006. The Company meets the definition of 
a qualifying entity under Financial Reporting Standard 100 (FRS 100) issued by the Financial Reporting Council. Accordingly, the financial statements 
have been prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework (FRS 101).

Under Section 408(4) of the Companies Act 2006, the Company is exempt from the requirement to present its own profit and loss account. 
The profit attributable to the Company is disclosed in the footnote to the Company’s balance sheet.

As permitted by FRS 101, the Company has taken advantage of the disclosure exemptions available under that standard in relation to share based 
payments, financial instruments, capital management, presentation of comparative information in respect of certain assets, presentation of a cash 
flow statement and certain related party transactions. Where required, equivalent disclosures are given in the consolidated financial statements.

The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis except for the remeasurement of certain financial instruments to fair value. 
The principal accounting policies adopted are the same as those set out in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements. The Company has 
adopted IFRS 9 Financial Instruments and IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers with effect from 1 April 2018. IFRS 9 has been adopted 
retrospectively and IFRS 15 has been adopted using the cumulative catch-up approach. Comparatives have not been restated. Neither standard had 
a significant impact on the financial statements of the Company.

Investments
Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost and reviewed for impairment if there are indications that the carrying values may not be recoverable.

2. INVESTMENT IN SUBSIDIARIES

Shares in Group undertakings
Cost at beginning and end of year

A list of the subsidiaries of Wincanton plc is given in Note 12 to the consolidated financial statements.

3. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Amounts owed by Group undertakings
Prepayments
Deferred tax assets

All receivables are due within one year, except prepayments of £0.4m (2018: £0.2m).

4. CURRENT LIABILITIES

Bank loans and overdrafts
Amounts owed to Group undertakings
Other payables
Other taxes and social security
Accruals and deferred income

Details of bank loans and overdrafts are given in Note 19 to the consolidated financial statements.

2019 
£m
108.9

2018 
£m
108.9

2019 
£m
68.9
0.6
0.5
70.0

2019 
£m
1.7
7.3
1.2
0.9
9.1
20.2

2018 
£m
84.7
0.5
0.6
85.8

2018 
£m
18.5
6.4
1.6
1.0
3.7
31.2

108

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

5. NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES

Bank loans
Other financial liabilities

Details of bank loans and other financial liabilities are given in Note 19 to the consolidated financial statements.

6. EQUITY

Allotted, called up and fully paid
At 1 April
Issued during the year
In issue at 31 March 

2019 
£m
32.0
–
32.0

10p Ordinary Shares

2019 
millions
124.5
–
124.5

2018 
£m
47.0
0.1
47.1

2018 
millions
123.7
0.8
124.5

Details of the Company’s own shares, held within an Employee Benefit Trust, are given in Note 22 to the consolidated financial statements. 
Details of the Company’s equity compensation benefits are given in Note 26 to the consolidated financial statements.

During the year ended 31 March 2002, the Company established a Capital Redemption Reserve of £49,998 on redemption of redeemable 
preference shares.

As permitted by Section 408 (4) of the Companies Act 2006, the Company has not presented its own profit and loss account. The Directors’ 
remuneration as disclosed in Note 5 to the consolidated financial statements is incurred by Wincanton plc. The Company has taken the exemption 
not to disclose non-audit fees incurred as these are included in Note 4 to the consolidated financial statements.

7. RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENT IN TOTAL EQUITY

Profit for the year
Dividends paid to shareholders
Other recognised gains and losses relating to the year
Current tax on share based payment transactions
Share based payment transactions
Own shares acquired
Net increase in shareholders’ funds
Opening shareholders’ funds
Closing shareholders’ funds

2019 
£m
20.5
(12.7)
0.1
0.1
(0.2)
(1.5)
6.3
125.0
131.3

2018 
£m
22.8
(11.6)
–
0.1
(2.1)
(2.1)
7.1
117.9
125.0

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

109

Additional information

GROUP FIVE YEAR RECORD

AS REPORTED UNDER ADOPTED IFRS

Revenue
Underlying operating profit1
Operating profit
Net financing costs 
Underlying profit before tax1
Profit before tax
Underlying profit after tax for the year1
Underlying earnings per share1
Basic earnings per share
Dividend per share 
Net debt

2019 
£m
1,141.5
55.3
54.6
(6.0)
49.3
48.6
41.5
33.5p
34.5p
10.89p
(19.3)

2018 
£m
1,171.9
52.9
44.4
(6.5)
46.4
37.9
38.1
30.8p
25.2p
9.9p
(29.5)

2017 
£m
1,118.1
52.1
56.0
(10.6)
41.5
45.4
34.0
27.7p
34.2p
9.1p
(24.3)

2016 
£m
1,147.4
50.9
81.4
(15.6)
35.3
65.8
28.8
23.9p
50.7p
5.5p
(39.5)

2015 
£m
1,107.4
49.7
43.2
(18.3)
31.4
24.9
24.5
21.1p
16.6p
–
(57.6)

1  Operating profit, and hence profit before and after tax are reported on an underlying basis, ie including, where applicable, share of results of associates but before amortisation of acquired 
intangibles, any impairment of goodwill and acquired intangibles, exceptional items, tax relating to these items and exceptional tax. Underlying earnings per share is calculated on the 
same basis.

110

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Strategic report

Governance

Directors’  
remuneration report

Directors’ report

Independent  
auditor’s report

Accounts

SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION

FINANCIAL CALENDAR

Annual General 
Meeting

Interim results 
for 2019/20
Full year results 
for 2019/20
Annual Report

To be held on 27 June 2019 at the 
offices of Buchanan Communications, 
107 Cheapside, London EC2V 6DN at 11am
Interim announcement November 2019

Preliminary announcement May 2020

 • check that they are properly authorised by the FCA by calling 
0800 111 6768 or by visiting www.fca.org.uk/register, and 
then contacting the firm using the details on the register

 • report the matter to the FCA either by calling 0800 111 6768 or visiting 

www.fca.org.uk/consumers

 • report suspected fraud and internet crime to the police through 
Action Fraud, which you can contact on 0300 123 2040 or visiting 
www.actionfraud.police.uk

Posted to shareholders in May 2020

 • if the calls persist, hang up

Annual Report
Copies can be obtained from the Company’s address below.

Shareholder enquiries
The Company’s Registrar is Computershare. If you have any questions 
about your holding or wish to notify any change in your details, 
please contact the Registrar at:

Computershare Investor Services plc  
The Pavilions, Bridgwater Road, Bristol BS99 6ZZ  
Telephone: 0370 702 0000.

Whenever you contact the Registrar, please quote the full name(s) 
in which your shares are held.

Dividends
Dividends are normally paid twice per year. The final dividend in respect 
of year ended 31 March 2019 will be payable, if approved, on 2 August 
2019 to those shareholders on the register on 5 July 2019.

The Company encourages its shareholders to have dividends paid 
directly into their bank or building society account. To set this up for 
the shares you hold, you should contact the Registrar for a dividend 
mandate form.

Share dealing service
Wincanton shares may be dealt through the Company’s brokers. 
If you would like further information, you may contact the brokers at: 
Corporate Broking, Numis Securities Ltd, the London Stock Exchange 
Building, 10 Paternoster Square, London, EC4M 7LT. Telephone number 
020 7260 1000. Alternatively please contact your bank, building society 
or stockbroker who will be able to assist you in dealing in your shares.

Share price quotation
The Company’s share price is quoted via the Wincanton website, 
where it is regularly updated through the day.

Shareholders’ enquiries
If you have an enquiry about the Company’s business or about 
something affecting you as a shareholder (other than queries regarding 
shareholdings which are dealt with by Computershare) you are invited 
to contact the Company at the address below.

Unsolicited mail
The Company is obliged to make its Register available to other 
organisations. Shareholders wishing to limit the amount of unsolicited 
mail they may receive as a result should contact the Mailing Preference 
Service at:

DMA House, 70 Margaret Street, London W1W 8SS 
or online at www.mpsonline.org.uk

Unsolicited investment advice
Shareholders are advised to be wary of unsolicited mail or telephone 
calls offering free advice, to buy shares at a discount or offering free 
company reports.

If you receive any unsolicited investment advice:

 • make sure you confirm the correct name of the person 

and organisation

 • inform Computershare’s Compliance Department

If you deal with an unauthorised firm, you will not be eligible to receive 
payments under the Financial Services Compensation Scheme. If you 
have already paid money to share fraudsters, you should contact Action 
Fraud on 0300 123 2040.

More detailed information on this or similar activity can be found 
on the FCA website www.fca.org.uk/consumers/scams

ShareGift
If you hold only a few shares and feel that it would be uneconomical 
or simply not worthwhile to sell them, you could consider donating 
your shares to charity through ShareGift (registered charity 1052686). 
Donated shares are aggregated and sold by ShareGift, the proceeds 
being passed on to a wide range of UK charities. To find out more 
visit www.sharegift.org or call 020 7930 3737. Alternatively contact the 
Company’s Registrar who can help arrange the transfer of your shares.

Wincanton plc website
The Wincanton website at www.wincanton.co.uk provides news and 
information about the services offered by Wincanton as well as useful 
information for investors.

Forward-looking statements
These Annual Report and Accounts and Wincanton’s website 
may contain certain ‘forward-looking statements’ with respect to 
Wincanton plc and the Group’s financial condition, results of operations 
and business, and certain of Wincanton plc’s and the Group’s plans, 
objectives, goals and expectations with respect to these items.

Forward-looking statements are sometimes, but not always, identified 
by their use of a date in the future or such words as ‘anticipates’, ‘aims’, 
‘due’, ‘could’, ‘may’, ‘should’, ‘expects’, ‘believes’, ‘intends’, ‘plans’, ‘targets’, 
‘goal’ or ‘estimates’. By their very nature forward-looking statements are 
inherently unpredictable, speculative and involve risk and uncertainty 
because they relate to events and depend on circumstances that will 
occur in the future. Many of these assumptions, risks and uncertainties 
relate to factors that are beyond the Group’s ability to control or estimate 
precisely. There are a number of such factors that could cause actual 
results and developments to differ materially from those expressed or 
implied by these forward-looking statements. These factors include, 
but are not limited to, changes in the economies and markets in which 
the Group operates; changes in the legal, regulatory and competition 
frameworks in which the Group operates; changes in the markets from 
which the Group raises finance; the impact of legal or other proceedings 
against or which affect the Group; changes in accounting practices 
and interpretation of accounting standards under IFRS, and changes 
in interest and exchange rates.

Any written or verbal forward-looking statements, made in our Annual 
Report and Accounts or on Wincanton’s website or made subsequently, 
which are attributable to Wincanton plc or any other member of the 
Group or persons acting on their behalf are expressly qualified in their 
entirety by the factors referred to above. Each forward-looking statement 
speaks only as of the date of our Annual Report and Accounts, or on the 
date the forward-looking statement is made. Wincanton plc does not 
intend to update any forward-looking statements.

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

111

Company’s Legal Advisers
DWF  
Registered office:  
1 Scott Place  
2 Hardman Street  
Manchester  
M3 3AA

Registered number: OC328794

Eversheds Sutherland 
Registered office:  
1 Wood Street  
London  
EC2V 7WS

Registered number: OC304065

Pinsent Masons LLP  
Registered office: 
30 Crown Place 
London 
EC2A 4ES

Registered number: OC333653

Clarks Legal  
Registered office:  
One Forbury Square  
The Forbury  
Reading  
Berkshire  
RG1 3EB

Registered number: OC308349

Clyde and Co  
Registered office:  
The St. Botolph Building  
138 Houndsditch  
London  
EC3A 7AR

Registered number: OC326539

Share registrar
Computershare Investor Services plc  
The Pavilions  
Bridgwater Road  
Bristol  
BS99 6ZZ

Additional information

BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND ADVISERS

BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND ADVISERS

Non-executive Directors
Dr. Martin Read CBE (Chairman) 
Stewart Oades  
Paul Dean  
David Radcliffe  
Martin Sawkins (retired 31 December 2018) 
Gill Barr

Executive Directors
Adrian Colman (Chief Executive Officer)  
Tim Lawlor (Chief Financial Officer)

Secretary and registered office
Raj Sharma 
Wincanton plc  
Methuen Park 
Chippenham 
Wiltshire 
SN14 0WT

Tel +44 (0)1249 71 00 00

Registered in England & Wales under No. 04178808

Auditors
KPMG LLP  
66 Queen Square  
Bristol  
BS1 4BE

Brokers
Numis Securities Limited  
The London Stock Exchange Building  
10 Paternoster Square  
London  
EC4M 7LT

HSBC Bank Plc 
8 Canada Square  
London  
E14 5HQ 

112

Wincanton plc Annual Report and Accounts 2019

Design and production  
Radley Yeldar www.ry.com

The paper used in this report is produced using virgin wood fibre from well-managed forests with FSC© certification. 
All pulps used are elemental chlorine free and manufactured at a mill that has been awarded the ISO 14001 and 
EMAS certificates for environmental management. The use of the FSC© logo identifies products which contain  
wood from well-managed forests certified in accordance with the rules of the Forest Stewardship Council.

Printed by CPI Colour, an FSC© and ISO 14001 accredited company, who is committed to all round excellence  
and improving environmental performance as an important part of this strategy.

WINCANTON.CO.UK

Wincanton plc

Methuen Park  
Chippenham 
Wiltshire SN14 0WT 
United Kingdom

Registered in England & 
Wales under No. 4178808

Tel +44 (0)1249 71 00 00